Skip to main content

Full text of "Tektronix Manual: 11801"

See other formats


Service Manual 



Tektronix 

/ 



11801C 

Digital Sampling Oscilloscope 
070-9972-02 



Warning 

The servicing instructions are for use by qualified 
personnel only. To avoid personal injury, do not 
perform any servicing unless you are qualified to 
do so. Refer to all safety summaries prior to 
performing service. 

C€ 




Copyright © Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved. 

Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication supercedes 
that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved. 

Printed in the U.S. A. 

Tektronix, Inc., RO. Box 1000, Wilsonville, OR 97070-1000 
TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc. 




WARRANTY 



Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1 ) year from the 
date of shipment. If any such product proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix, at its option, either will repair the 
defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product. 

In order to obtain service under this warranty. Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty 
period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service. Customer shall be responsible for packaging and 
shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges prepaid. Tektronix shall 
pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the Tektronix service 
center is located. Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges, duties, taxes, and any other charges for 
products returned to any other locations. 

This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance 
and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a) to repair damage resulting from attempts by 
personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair damage resulting from 
improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; or c) to service a product that has been modified or integrated with 
other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product. 

THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER 
WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF 
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TEKTRONIX’ RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR 
REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR 
BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, 
INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS 
ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. 




EC Declaration of Conformity 



We 

Tektronix Holland N.V. 

Marktweg 73 A 
8444 AB Heerenveen 
The Netherlands 

declare under sole responsibility that the 

11801C Digital Sampling Oscilloscope 

meets the intent of Directive 89/336/EEC for Electromagnetic Compatihility and Eow 
Voltage Directive 73/23/ECC for Product Safety. Compliance was demonstrated to the 
following specifications as listed in the Official Journal of the European Communities: 

EMC Directive 89/336/EEC: 

EN 55011 Class A Radiated and Conducted Emissions 

EN 50082-1 Immunity: 

lEC 801-2 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity 

lEC 801-3 RE Electromagnetic Eield Immunity 

lEC 801-4 Electrical East Transient/Burst Immunity 
lEC 801-5 Power Eine Surge Immunity 

Eow Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC: 

EN 61010-1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for 

measurement, control, and laboratory use 



Tektronix, Inc. claims compliance to the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC for the following 
products when they are used with the above named product: 

SD-20 

SD-22 

SD-24 

SD-26 

SD-30 

SD-32 

SD-42 

SD-46 

SD-51 





Declaration of Conformity 
with Electromagnetic Compatibility Standards 
as Required under the Radiocommunications Act 



We 

Tektronix, Inc. 
of 

Tektronix Australia Pty Limited 
80 Waterloo Road 
North Ryde NSW 2113 

Supplier Code: N60 

declare under sole responsibility that the 

11801C Digital Sampling Oscilloscope 
to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the following standards: 

AS/NZS 2064.1/2 Industrial, Scientific, and Medical Equipment: 1992 



Tektronix, Inc. claims conformity to the standards for the following products when they 
are used with the above named product: 

SD-20 

SD-22 

SD-24 

SD-26 

SD-30 

SD-32 

SD-42 

SD-46 

SD-51 





Contacting Tektronix 



Product 

Support 



Service 

Support 



For other 
information 

To write us 



For application-oriented questions about a Tektronix measurement 
product, call toll free in North America: 

1-800-TEK-WIDE (1-800-835-9433 ext. 2400) 

6:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m. Pacific time 

Or, contact us by e-mail: 
tm_app_supp@tek.com 

For product support outside of North America, contact your local 
Tektronix distributor or sales office. 

Contact your local Tektronix distributor or sales office. Or, visit our web 
site for a listing of worldwide service locations. 

http://www.tek.com 

In North America: 

1-800-TEK-WIDE (1-800-835-9433) 

An operator will direct your call. 

Tektronix, Inc. 

RO. Box 1000 

Wilsonville, OR 97070-1000 



11801C Service Manual 



I 





Contacting Tektronix 



a 



Contacting Tektronix 





Table of Contents 



Contacting Tektronix i 

Generai Safety Summary xvii 

Service Safety Summary xix 



Specifications 



Operating information 

Sampling Head Installation and Removal 2-2 

Power Information 2-4 

Power Cord Information 2-5 

Memory Backup Power 2-6 

Operating Environment 2-6 

Operating Temperature 2-6 

Ventilation Requirements 2-6 

Packaging for Shipment 2-7 



Theory of Operation 

System Functional Overview 3-3 

Acquisition System Block 3-3 

Strobe Distribution Block 3-3 

Time Base/Controller Block 3-3 

Trigger Select Block 3-3 

Executive Processor Block 3-4 

Memory Management Unit Block 3-4 

Waveform Memory Block 3-4 

Front Panel Controls 3-5 

I/O Block 3-5 

Waveform Compressor and Display Control Block 3-5 

Power Supply 3-6 

Typical Waveform Processing Cycle 3-6 



Hi 



11801C Service Manual 





Table of Contents 



Block Diagram Descriptions 3-7 

A1 M/F Strobe Drive Board 3-7 

Data Buffers 3-7 

Address Latch 3-7 

Function Decoder 3-7 

Internal Clock Rate Generator 3-7 

Control Buffer 3-8 

A3 M/F Power Connect Board 3-8 

A4 Regulator Board 3-8 

Voltage Fault Detect 3-8 

A5 Time Base/Controiier Board 3-9 

Microprocessor 3-9 

RAM/ROM Memory 3-9 

Trigger 3-9 

Time Base 3-11 

Acquisition System Interface 3-11 

Memory Management (MMU) Interface 3-11 

A7 CRT Socket Board 3-12 

Red, Green, and Blue Video Amplifiers 3-12 

Red, Green, and Blue Adjustments 3-12 

Convergence Adjustment 3-12 

A8 CRT Driver Board 3-13 

Horizontal Sweep 3-13 

Vertical Sweep 3-13 

High Voltage and Grid Voltage Generator 3-13 

Degauss 3-14 

Beam Current Limit 3-14 

Grid Bias 3-14 

A9, A10, and All Front Panel Boards 3-14 

Touch Panel, Major Menu Keys, and Menu Status LEDs .... 3-14 

A9 Touch Panel Assembly 3-14 

A10 Front Panel Control Board 3-15 

A1 1 Front Panel Button Board 3-15 

A12 Rear Panel Assembly 3-15 

GPIB Data and Address Bus 3-16 

Standard RS-232-C Controller 3-16 

PrinterPort 3-17 

A1 3 Mother Board 3-17 

A1 4 Input/Output (I/O) Board 3-18 

I/O Data Buffer 3-18 

I/O Delayed Data Buffer 3-18 

Timer Configuration 3-19 

Real Time Clock 3-19 

Serial Data Interface (SDI) 3-19 

Tone Generator 3-19 

Temp/Tone Readback Buffer 3-19 



IV 



Contents 





Table of Contents 



A15 Memory Management (MMU) Board 3-20 

MMU IC 3-20 

Waveform RAM 3-20 

Display Interface 3-20 

Time Base/Controller Interface 3-21 

Executive Processor (EXP) Interface 3-21 

Display IC 3-21 

Microprocessor 3-21 

Bit Map RAM 3-21 

Waveform Display RAM 3-22 

Video Digital-to-Analog Convertor (DAC) 3-22 

A1 7 Executive Processor Board 3-22 

Executive Processor (EXP) 3-22 

Numeric Coprocessor 3-23 

Bus Controller 3-23 

Reset 3-23 

Wait State 3-23 

Interrupt Controllers 3-23 

DMA Controller 3-23 

A1 8 Memory Board 3-24 

Address Latches 3-24 

Address Decode and Memory Select 3-24 

EPROMs, SRAM, and NVRAM 3-25 

Memory Data Buffers 3-25 

Wait State Generator 3-25 

Wait State Diagnostics 3-25 

Memory Configuration Readback 3-25 

Battery Backup 3-25 

A19 Strobe/TDR Buffer Board 3-26 

Strobe Sense Select 3-26 

Strobe Deskew 3-26 

TDR Buffer and Level Shift 3-26 

A20-23 Head Interconnect Boards 3-26 

A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect Board 3-27 

A24/A27 & A25/A28 Acquisition System Boards 3-27 

Programmable Gain Amplifiers 3-27 

A/D Convertors 3-28 

Measurement Hardware 3-28 

Timing and Sampling Head Control 3-28 

Shared RAM 3-29 

Time Base/Controller Interface 3-29 

Microprocessor 3-29 



11801C Service Manual 



V 





Table of Contents 



Performance Verification 

Test Equipment 4-3 

Test Record 4-6 

Using These Procedures 4-11 

Conventions in this Manual 4-11 

Menu Selections and Measurement Techniques 4-11 

User Manual 4-11 

Performance Tests 4-13 

Power-On Diagnostics 4-14 

Setup to Invoke Power-On Diagnostics 4-14 

Procedure to Invoke Power-On Diagnostics 4-14 

Diagnostics 4-15 

Self-Test Diagnostics 4-15 

Power-On Diagnostics Complete 4-16 

Sampling Heads 4-17 

Setup to Calibrate a Sampling Head 4-17 

Procedure to Calibrate a Sampling Head 4-17 

Extended Diagnostics 4-19 

Setup to Invoke Extended Diagnostics 4-19 

Procedure to Invoke Extended Diagnostics 4-19 

Vertical Reference Voltage 4-21 

Specifications 4-21 

Setup to Check Vertical Reference Voltage 4-21 

Procedure to Check Vertical Reference Voltage 4-21 

Horizontal Reference Clock 4-23 

Specifications 4-23 

Setup to Check Horizontal Reference Clock 4-23 

Procedure to Check Horizontal Reference Clock 4-23 

Vertical Accuracy 4-25 

Setup to Check Vertical Gain 4-25 

Procedure to Check Vertical Gain 4-25 

Setup to Check Offset Accuracy 4-28 

Procedure to Check Offset Accuracy 4-28 

System Vertical RMS Noise 4-31 

Setup to Examine Vertical RMS Noise 4-31 

Procedure to Examine Vertical RMS Noise 4-31 

Sweep Rate Accuracy 4-34 

Setup to Examine Sweep Rate Accuracy 4-34 

Procedure to Examine Sweep Rate Accuracy 4-34 

Sweep Rate Accuracy 2 ns/div 4-35 

Sweep Rate Accuracy 1 ns/div 4-36 

Sweep Rate Accuracy 1 00 ps/div 4-36 

Sweep Rate Accuracy 1 0 ps/div 4-36 

Sweep Rate Accuracy 1 ps/div 4-37 



VI 



Contents 





Table of Contents 



Triggering, Externai Direct 4-39 

Specifications 4-39 

Setup to Check Triggering 4-39 

Procedure to Check Triggering 4-39 

Prescaier Triggering 4-41 

Specifications 4-41 

Setup to Check Prescaler Triggering 4-41 

Procedure to Check Prescaler Triggering 4-41 

Internal Clock 4-43 

Measurement Limits 4-43 

Setup to Examine Internal Clock 4-43 

Procedure to Examine Internal Clock 4-43 

Calibrator Output 4-45 

Measurement Limits 4-45 

Setup to Examine Calibrator Output 4-45 

Procedure to Examine Calibrator 4-45 



Adjustment 

Test Equipment 5-3 

Using These Procedures 5-6 

Conventions in this Manual 5-6 

Menu Selections and Measurement Techniques 5-6 

User Manual 5-6 

Power Supply 5-7 

Measurement Limits 5-7 

Setup to Examine Voltage Supply 5-7 

Procedure to Examine Voltage Supply 5-7 

Setup to Examine/Adjust Voltage Reference 5-9 

Procedure to Examine/Adjust Voltage Reference 5-9 

Setup to Examine/Adjust Regulator Reference 5-11 

Procedure to Examine/Adjust Regulator Reference 5-11 

Display 5-13 

Measurement Limits 5-13 

Setup to Examine/Adjust the Display 5-14 

Procedure to Examine/ Adjust the Display 5-14 

Real Time Clock 5-20 

Measurement Limits 5-20 

Setup to Examine/Adjust Real Time Clock 5-20 

Procedure to Examine/Adjust Real Time Clock 5-20 



11801C Service Manual 



vii 





Table of Contents 



Maintenance 



Preventive Maintenance 6-1 

Removing the Cabinet Paneis 6-1 

Cieaning the instrument 6-2 

Exterior 6-2 

CRT 6-2 

Interior 6-3 

Visuai inspection 6-3 

Periodic Electricai Adjustment 6-3 

Corrective Maintenance 6-5 

Power Suppiy Voitage Hazard 6-5 

Ordering Parts 6-5 

Static-Sensitive Device Ciassification 6-6 

Removing and Replacing FRUs 6-8 

Eiectrical Lock-on of the Front Panei ON/STANDBY 

Power Switch 6-13 

Power Suppiy Moduie Removai/Replacement 6-16 

Fan Motor Removai/Repiacement 6-19 

Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) Removai/Repiacement 6-20 

Acquisition Unit Removai/Repiacement 6-26 

Battery Disposai and First Aid 6-27 

Battery Disposal 6-27 

Emergency and First Aid Information 6-28 

FRU Board and Assembly Removal 6-29 

A1 M/F Strobe Drive Board 6-31 

A3 M/F Power Connect Board 6-32 

A4 Regulator Board 6-34 

A5 Time Base/Controller Board 6-35 

A7 CRT Socket Board and A8 CRT Driver Board 6-37 

A9 Touch Panel Assembly 6-40 

A10 Front Panel Control Board 6-42 

A1 1 Front Panel Button Board 6-44 

A1 2 Rear Panel Assembly 6-45 

A1 3 Mother Board 6-47 

A1 4 Input/Output (I/O) Board 6-49 

A15 Memory Management Unit (MMU) Board 6-51 

A1 7 Executive Processor (EXP) Board 6-53 

A1 8 Memory Board 6-55 

A1 9 Strobe/TDR Buffer Board 6-57 

A20-A23 Head Interconnect Boards 6-59 

A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect Board 6-61 

A24/A27 Acquisition Analog Boards 6-63 

A25/A28 Acquisition MPU Boards 6-64 



via 



Contents 





Table of Contents 



FRU 1C Removal 6-65 

Serial Data Interface Integrated Circuits (“Slam-Pack” ICs) . . 6-65 

Firmware Integrated Circuits (“Dual In-Line Package” ICs) . . 6-68 

Firmware Upgrade Procedure 6-69 

Cables and Connectors 6-75 

Interconnecting Pins 6-75 

Coaxial-type End-Lead Connectors (Peltolas & SMB) 6-75 

Multi-Pin Connectors 6-75 

Checks After FRU Replacement 6-77 

Diagnostic Troubleshooting 6-79 

Diagnostics Overview 6-79 

Kernel Diagnostics 6-80 

Self-Test/Extended Diagnostics 6-81 

Extended Diagnostics Menu Structure 6-81 

Extended Diagnostics Error Index Codes 6-81 

Diagnostic Menus 6-84 

Diagnostic Menu Hardcopy 6-85 

Diagnostic Terminal Mode (RS-232-C) 6-86 

System Mode (GPIB & RS-232-C) 6-87 

Battery Testing 6-89 

Clearing NVRAM 6-90 

Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Guide 6-91 

FRU Name Abbreviations 6-92 

Component and Module Name Abbreviations 6-93 

Executive Subsystem Error Index Codes 6-94 

Display Subsystem Error Index Codes 6-98 

Time Base Processor Error Index Codes 6-100 

Acquisition Processor Error Index Codes 6-102 

Other Troubleshooting 6-103 

Power Supply Module 6-103 

Module Troubleshooting 6-103 

A4 Regulator Board 6-103 

CRT, A7 CRT Socket Board, or A8 CRT Driver Board 6-104 

Module Troubleshooting 6-104 

A1 3 Mother Board 6-104 

Fuse Testing 6-105 

Time Base Calibration Errors 6-108 

Acquisition Calibration Errors 6-110 



Options 

Instrument Options 7-1 

Power Cord Information 7-2 



11801C Service Manual 



/X 





Table of Contents 



Electrical Parts List 

Electrical Parts 8-1 



Diagrams 



Replaceable Parts List 



Replaceable Parts 10-1 

Parts Ordering Information 10-1 

Module Replacement 10-1 

Firmware Replacement 10-1 

Using the Repiaceable Parts List 10-2 

Item Names 10-2 

Indentation System 10-2 

Abbreviations 10-2 



X 



Contents 





List of Figures 



Figure 2-1 : Sampling Head Compartments in the 11 801 C Digital 

Sampling Oscilloscope 2-2 

Figure 2-2: Power-Cord Plug Identification 2-5 

Figure 3-1 : Trigger Edge Slew Rate for High Frequency Selection . . 3-10 

Figure 4-1 : A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect Board Test Point 

Locations 4-22 

Figure 4-2: A5 Time Base/Controller Board Test Point Locations . . . 4-24 

Figure 5-1: A1 8 Memory Board Test Point Locations 5-8 

Figure 5-2: A2A2 Control Rectifier Board Test Point and 

Adjustment Locations 5-10 

Figure 5-3: A4 Regulator Board Test Point and Adjustment 

Locations 5-12 

Figure 5-4: A8 CRT Driver Board Adjustment Locations 5-18 

Figure 5-5: A7 CRT Socket Board Adjustment Locations 5-19 

Figure 5-6: A14 I/O Board Test Point and Adjustment Locations .... 5-22 

Figure 6-1: Field Replaceable Units (FRU) Locator 6-14 

Figure 6-2: Removing the Power Supply Module, Fan Housing, 

and Rear Panel Connector Plate 6-16 

Figure 6-3: A2A2 Control Rectifier Board Connector Locations 6-17 

Figure 6-4: Removing/Replacing the CRT Cover 6-23 

Figure 6-5: Removing/Replacing the Cathode Ray Tube 6-24 

Figure 6-6: Removing/Replacing the CRT Torx Head Screws 6-25 

Figure 6-7: Top View of the Card Cage 6-30 

Figure 6-8: Removing/Replacing the A1 M/F Strobe Drive Board . . . 6-31 

Figure 6-9: Removing/Replacing the A4 Regulator Board 6-33 

Figure 6-1 0: Removing/Replacing the A5 Time Base/Controller 

Board 6-36 

Figure 6-1 1 : Removing/Replacing the A7 CRT Socket Board 6-38 

Figure 6-1 2: Removing/Replacing the A8 CRT Driver Board 6-39 

Figure 6-13: A9 Touch Panel Assembly Torx Head Screws 6-41 

Figure 6-14: Removing/Replacing the A9 Touch Panel Assembly . . . 6-41 

Figure 6-1 5: Removing/Replacing the A1 0 Front Panel 

Control Board 6-43 

Figure 6-1 6: Removing/Replacing the A1 1 Front Panel 

Button Board 6-44 

Figure 6-17: Removing/Replacing the A12 Rear Panel Assembly . . . 6-46 

Figure 6-1 8: Removing/Replacing the A1 3 Mother Board 6-48 

Figure 6-1 9: Removing/Replacing the A1 4 I/O Board 6-50 

Figure 6-20: Removing/Replacing the A1 5 MMU Board 6-52 



1 1 801 C Service Manual x/ 





List of Figures 



Figure 6-21 : Removing/Replacing the A1 7 Executive Processor 

Board 6-54 

Figure 6-22: Removing/Replacing the A1 8 Memory Board 6-56 

Figure 6-23: Removing/Replacing the A19 Strobe/TDR Buffer 

Board 6-58 

Figure 6-24: Removing/Replacing the A20-A23 Head Interconnect 

Boards 6-59 

Figure 6-25: Removing/Replacing the Front Subpanel Assembly . . . 6-60 

Figure 6-26: Removing/Replacing the A26 M/F Acquisition 

Interconnect Board 6-61 

Figure 6-27: Top View of the A26 Mainframe Acquisition 

Interconnect Board 6-62 

Figure 6-28: Removing/Replacing the A24/A27 Acquisition 

Analog Boards 6-63 

Figure 6-29: Removing/Replacing the A25/A28 Acquisition 

MPU Boards 6-64 

Figure 6-30: FRU 1C Detail 6-67 

Figure 6-31 : 1C Insertion-Extraction Tool 6-69 

Figure 6-32: Multi-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 

Indexing Diagram 6-74 

Figure 6-33: A1 7 Executive Processor Board Test Point and 

Status LED Locations 6-95 

Figure 6-34: A15 MMU Board Test Point and Status 

LED Locations 6-99 

Figure 6-35: A5 Time Base/Controller Board Status LEDs 6-101 

Figure 6-36: A25/A28 Acquisition MPU Board Status LEDs 6-102 

Figure 6-37: A1 4 I/O Board Fuse Locator Diagram 6-107 

Figure 7-1 : Power-Cord Plug Identification 7-2 

Figure 9-1 : 11801 C-System Functional Block Diagram 9-1 

Figure 9-2: A1 M/F Strobe Drive Board Block Diagram 9-1 

Figure 9-3: A4 Regulator Board Block Diagram 9-2 

Figure 9-4: A5 Time Base/Controller Board Block Diagram 9-2 

Figure 9-5: A7 CRT Socket Board Block Diagram 9-2 

Figure 9-6: A8 CRT Driver Board Block Diagram 9-3 

Figure 9-7: A1 2 Rear Panel Assembly Block Diagram 9-3 

Figure 9-8: A1 4 I/O Board Block Diagram 9-4 

Figure 9-9: A1 5 MMU Board Block Diagram 9-4 

Figure 9-10: A1 7 Executive Processor Board Block Diagram 9-4 

Figure 9-1 1 : A18 Memory Board Block Diagram 9-5 

Figure 9-1 2: A1 9 Strobe/TDR Buffer Board Block Diagram 9-5 

Figure 9-13: A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect Board Block 

Diagram 9-5 

Figure 9-1 4: A24/A27 Acquisition Analog Board Block Diagram .... 9-6 

Figure 9-1 5: A25/A28 Acquisition MPU Board Block Diagram 9-6 



x/7 Contents 





List of Figures 



Figure 10-1: Cabinet 10-7 

Figure 10-2: Front Panel 10-9 

Figure 10-3: Chassis, Rear 10-11 

Figure 10-4: Circuit Boards 10-13 

Figure 10-5: Acquisition Module 10-17 

Figure 10-6: Power Supply 10-19 

Figure 10-7: Option 1M 10-21 

Figure 10-8: Accessories 10-23 



xiii 



11801C Service Manuai 





List of Figures 



xtV Contents 





List of Tables 



Table 1-1 : Measurement Limits, Specifications, Adjustments, 

and Functional Tests 1-1 

Table 2-1 : Power-Cord Conductor Identification 2-5 

Table 4-1 : Measurement Limits, Specifications, and 

Functional Tests 4-1 

Table 4-2: Test Equipment 4-3 

Table 4-3: Voltage Source Settings 4-27 

Table 4-4: Vertical Offset Test Values 4-30 

Table 4-5: Sensitivity Settings 4-33 

Table 4-6: Prescaler Test Settings 4-42 

Table 5-1 : Measurement Limits and Adjustments 5-2 

Table 5-2: Test Equipment 5-3 

Table 6-1 : Relative Susceptibility to Damage from Static Discharge . 6-6 

Table 6-2: FRU Removal/Replacement Figure Cross Reference .... 6-8 

Table 6-3: Emergency Procedures for Contact with Battery Solvent . 6-28 

Table 6-4: Checks Required After FRU Replacement 6-77 

Table 6-5: Extended Diagnostics Error Index Code Descriptions ... 6-82 

Table 6-6: System Mode Commands 6-87 

Table 6-7: Event Code Descriptions 6-87 

Table 6-8: Board FRUs 6-92 

Table 6-9: Component Module FRUs 6-93 

Table 6-10: Executive Processor Kernel Error Index Codes 6-94 

Table 6-1 1 : Executive Processor Status LED Configuration 6-95 

Table 6-12: Executive Processor Manual Tests 6-96 

Table 6-13: Display Processor Kernel Error Index Codes 6-98 

Table 6-14: Display Processor Status LED Configuration 6-98 

Table 6-15: Time Base Processor Kernel Error Index Codes 6-100 

Table 6-16: Acquisition Processor Kernel Error Index Codes 6-102 

Table 6-17: A1 4 I/O Board Fuse Failures 6-106 

Table 6-18: Time Base Calibration Errors 6-109 

Table 7-1 : Power-Cord Conductor Identification 7-2 

Table 10-1: Board FRUs 10-3 



11801C Service Manual 



XV 





List of Tables 



xvi Contents 





General Safety Summary 



Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to 
this product or any products connected to it. To avoid potential hazards, use this 
product only as specified. 

Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures. 

While using this product, you may need to access other parts of the system. Read 
the General Safety Summary in other system manuals for warnings and cautions 
related to operating the system. 



To Avoid Firo or Use Proper Power Cord. Use only the power cord specified for this product and 
Personal Injury certified for the country of use. 

Use Proper Voltage Setting. Before applying power, ensure that the line selector is 
in the proper position for the power source being used. 

Connect and Disconnect Properly. Do not connect or disconnect prohes or test 
leads while they are connected to a voltage source. 

Ground the Product. This product is grounded through the grounding conductor 
of the power cord. To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must he 
connected to earth ground. Before making connections to the input or output 
terminals of the product, ensure that the product is properly grounded. 

Observe All Terminal Ratings. To avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all ratings 
and markings on the product. Consult the product manual for further ratings 
information before making connections to the product. 

Do Not Operate Without Covers. Do not operate this product with covers or panels 
removed. 

Use Proper Fuse. Use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product. 

Avoid Exposed Circuitry. Do not touch exposed connections and components 
when power is present. 

Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures. If you suspect there is damage to this 
product, have it inspected by qualified service personnel. 

Do Not Operate in Wet/Damp Conditions. 

Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere. 

Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry. 

Provide Proper Ventilation. Refer to the manual’s installation instructions for 
details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation. 



11 801 C Service Manual 



xvii 





General Safety Summary 



Symbols and Tarms Terms in this Manual. These terms may appear in this manual: 



WARNING. Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result 
in injury or loss of life. 



CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in 
damage to this product or other property. 





Terms on the Product. These terms may appear on the product: 

DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessihle as you read the 
marking. 

WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessihle as you read the 
marking. 

CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product. 

Symbols on the Product. The following symbols may appear on the product: 



A 


© 


A 


□ 


WARNING 


Protective 


CAUTION 


Double 


High Volt- 


Ground (Earth) 


Refer to Manual 


Insulated 


age 


Terminal 







xWi7 



Contents 





Service Safety Summary 



Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures. Read this Service 
Safety Summary and the General Safety Summary before performing any service 
procedures. 

Do Not Service Alone. Do not perform internal service or adjustments of this 
product unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is 
present. 

Disconnect Power. To avoid electric shock, disconnect the mains power by means 
of the power cord or, if provided, the power switch. 

Use Caution When Servicing the CRT. To avoid electric shock or injury, use 
extreme caution when handling the CRT. Only qualified personnel familiar with 
CRT servicing procedures and precautions should remove or install the CRT. 

CRTs retain hazardous voltages for long periods of time after power is turned off. 
Before attempting any servicing, discharge the CRT by shorting the anode to 
chassis ground. When discharging the CRT, connect the discharge path to ground 
and then the anode. Rough handling may cause the CRT to implode. Do not nick 
or scratch the glass or subject it to undue pressure when removing or installing it. 
When handling the CRT, wear safety goggles and heavy gloves for protection. 

Use Care When Servicing With Power On. Dangerous voltages or currents may 
exist in this product. Disconnect power, remove battery (if applicable), and 
disconnect test leads before removing protective panels, soldering, or replacing 
components. 

To avoid electric shock, do not touch exposed connections. 

X-Radiation. To avoid x-radiation exposure, do not modify or otherwise alter the 
high-voltage circuitry or the CRT enclosure. X-ray emissions generated within 
this product have been sufficiently shielded. 



11 801 C Service Manual 



x/x 





Service Safety Summary 



XX 



Contents 





Specifications 



This section provides specifications for testing and adjusting your 1 1 801 C 
oscilloscope. Refer to the 11 801 C L/ser Manua/ for a general description of 
the characteristic, environmental, and user specifications of the oscillo- 
scope. Table 1-1 lists measurement and specification values. Refer to the 
Performance Verification section for Performance test procedures; refer to 
the Adjustment section for Adjustment procedures. 



Table 1-1: Measurement Limits, Specifications, Adjustments, and Functional Tests 



Part and Description 


Measurement 
Limits (Examine) 


Specifications 

(Check) 


Adjustments 

(Adjust) 


Functional 

Test 


Power-On Diagnostics 


none 


none 


none 


yes 


Sampling Head 


none 


none 


none 


yes 


Extended Diagnostics 


none 


none 


none 


yes 


Power Supply 








no 


Voltage Supply 


-1-4.85 V to 
+5.25 V 


none 


none 




Voltage Reference 


-1-5.15 V to 
+5.25 V 


none 


R800 -1-5.2 V Ref 
for -1-5.20 V 




Regulator Reference 


-1-9.95 V to 
-1-10.05 V 


none 


R730 -1-10 V Ref 
for -1-10.00 V 




Display 










Cutoff 


visible 


none 


SCREEN, on 
transformer on A8 
CRT Driver board, 
until display 
appears 


no 


Convergence 


primary colors are not 
separated in the white 
grid 


none 


CCNVERGENCE, 
R210,for 
optimum 
convergence of 
red, green, and 
blue 


no 


Focus 


focused grid pattern 


none 


FCCUS, on 
transformer on A8 
CRT Driver board, 
for optimum 
focus on white 
grid pattern 


no 





11801C Service Manual 



7-1 















Specifications 



Table 1-1: Measurement Limits, Specifications, Adjustments, and Functional Tests (Cont.) 



Part and Description 


Measurement 
Limits (Examine) 


Specifications 

(Check) 


Adjustments 

(Adjust) 


Functional 

Test 


Display (Cont.) 


Vertical Size and 
Position 


align with tic marks 


none 


VERT SIZE, L321 ; 
and VERT POS, 
R31 1 ; for 
optimum 
alignment 


no 


Horizontal Size, 
Linearity and 
Position 


align with tic marks and 
for optimum 
appearance 


none 


H-SIZE, R501; 
H-LIN, R502; and 
H-POS, R500; for 
optimum 
alignment and 
linearity 


no 


Gray Scale 


white at the top of the 
display and gray at the 
bottom, and the right 
side of the display is 
cut off 


none 


SCREEN, on 
transformer on A8 
CRT Driver board; 
RED, R200; 
GREEN, R201; 
and BLUE, R203; 
for cutoff and 
color balance 


no 


Color Impurity 


no severe color 
impurities in red, green, 
and blue display 


none 


cycle power on 
and off 


no 


Real Time Clock 


1,000,000 ps ±5 ps 


none 


Real Time Clock 
for 1 ,000,000 ps 


no 


Vertical Reference Voltage 


none 


5 ±200 pV and 
-5 ±200 pV 


none 


no 


Horizontal Reference Clock 


none 


200,000 kHz 
±5 kHz 


none 


no 


Vertical Accuracy 


Vertical Gain 


none 


±1.0% full scale 


none 


yes 


Offset Accuracy 


none 


±2 mV 


none 


yes 


Vertical Linearity 


none 


±1% 


none 


no 


System Vertical RMS Noise 


200 pV at 2 mV/div 
500 pV at 5 mV/div 
1 mV at 10 mV/div 
632 pV at 20 mV/div 
1 .58 mV at 500 mV/div 
3.16 mV at 100 mV/div 
6.32 mV at 200 mV/div 


none 


none 


yes 













1-2 



Specifications 

















Specifications 



Table 1-1: Measurement Limits, Specifications, Adjustments, and Functional Tests (Cont.) 



Part and Description 


Measurement 
Limits (Examine) 


Specifications 

(Check) 


Adjustments 

(Adjust) 


Functional 

Test 


Sweep Rate Accuracy 


0.05% at 2 ns/div 
0.08% at 1 ns/div 
0.8% at 100 ps/div 
2.5% at 10 ps/div 
10% at 1 ps/div 


none 


none 


yes 


Triggering, External Direct, XI Attenuation 






yes 


300 MHz Sensitivity 


100 mVp.pat300 MHz 


1 00 mV stable 
display 


none 




1000 MHz Sensitivity 


100 mVp.pat1000 MHz 


1 00 mV stable 
display 


none 




3.0 GHz Sensitivity 


100 mVp.p at 3.0 GHz 


1 00 mV stable 
display 


none 




Prescaler Triggering 


800 mVp.p at 2 GHz 


800 mV stable 
display 


none 


yes 




600 mVp_p at 3 GHz 


600 mV stable 
display 


none 






600 mVp_p at 1 0 GHz 


600 mV stable 
display 


none 




Internal Clock 








yes 


Rise Time 


<2.5 ns 


<2.5 ns 


none 




Frequency 


100 kHz ±3% 


100 kHz ±3% 


none 




Duty Cycle 


50% ±3% 


50% ±3% 


none 




Calibrator Output 








yes 


Rise Time (typical) 


250 ps 


250 ps 


none 




Peak-to-peak Amplitude 


250 mV ±10% 


250 mV ±10% 


none 





11801C Service Manuai 



7-3 
















Specifications 



1-4 



Specifications 





Operating Information 



The 1 1801C Digital Sampling Oscilloscope Service Manual is designed for 
use by qualified service personnel. It contains information necessary to 
check, troubleshoot, and maintain the 11801C Digital Sampling Oscillo- 
scope. 

Troubleshooting is primarily based upon internal power-on diagnostics. 
These diagnostics isolate problems to the field replaceable unit (FRU) level. 
Defective FRUs not detected by diagnostics are isolated using other means. 
Once the faulty FRU is identified, use the instructions provided in this manu- 
al to remove and replace it. The removal and immediate replacement of the 
faulty FRU allows a minimum of downtime for the user. The Parts List section 
gives a complete list of the FRUs in this instrument. 

First-time users are encouraged to read the 1 1801C Digital Sampling Oscil- 
loscope User Manual. This will help you to learn the basic functions of the 
118010. 

This section contains information about installing and removing a sampling 
head, applying power, proper environmental conditions, shipping the instru- 
ment, and instrument options. 



11 801 C Service Manual 



2-1 





Operating Information 



Sampling Head 
Installation and 
Removal 



To avoid damage to the oscilloscope, set the ON/STANDBY switch to 
STANDBY before installing or removing sampling heads. 




Applying a voltage outside the range printed on the sampling head 
can result in damage. Static electricity is also a hazard. 



The input diodes used in the sampling heads are very susceptible to dam- 
age from overdrive signal or DC voltages, and from electrostatic discharge. 
Never apply a voltage outside the range printed on the front of the sampling 
head. Operate the 1 1801 C only in a static-controlled environment. 

Connect the wrist strap provided with the 1 1 801 C to the ANTISTATIC CON- 
NECTION, as shown in Figure 2-1 . Refer to the 1 1801C Digital Sampling 
Oscilloscope User Manual tor more information. 

The SD-Series sampling head slides into one of the front panel compart- 
ments of the 1 1 801 C Digital Sampling Oscilloscope. Figure 2-1 shows the 
front panel of the 11801C Digital Sampling Oscilloscope and the locations of 
the sampling head compartments. 



Sampling Head 
Compartments 




Antistatic 

Connection 



Figure 2-1: Sampling Head Compartments in the 11 801 C Digital 
Sampling Oscilloscope 



2-2 



Operating Information 







Operating Information 



With the ON/STANDBY switch set to STANDBY, place the sampling head in a 
compartment and slowly push it in with firm pressure. Once the sampling 
head is seated, turn the lock-down screw to tighten the sampling head in 
place. 




Never install or remove a sampling head when the ON/STANDBY 
switch is ON. Installing or removing a sampling head when the 
power is on may damage the oscilliscope. 



To remove the sampling head, set the ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY. 
Turn the lock-down screw to loosen the sampling head, and then slowly pull 
out the sampling head. 



11801C Service Manual 



2-3 






Operating Information 



Power Information 



The rear panel LINE VOLTAGE SELECTOR allows you to select either a 
1 1 5 V or 230 V (48 Hz to 440 Hz) nominal supply source. The 6 A, 250 V line 
fuse is used for both 115V and 230 V operation. 

^ARNIN^ 



GROUNDING. For electric shock protection, make the grounding 
connection before making any connection to the instrument’s input 
or output terminals. This instrument is safety Class 1 equipment 
(lEC designation). All accessible conductive parts are directly 
connected through the grounding conductor of the power cord to 
the grounded (earth) contact of the power plug. 

Any interruption of the grounding connection can create an electri- 
cal shock hazard. The power input plug must be inserted only in a 
mating receptacle with a grounding contact where earth ground 
has been verified by a qualified service person. Do not defeat the 
grounding connection. 



WARNING 



AC POWER SOURCE AND CONNECTION. An improper voltage 
supply can damage the instrument. The instrument operates from a 
single-phase power source. It has a three-wire power cord and 
two-pole, three-terminal grounding type plug. The voltage to 
ground (earth) from either pole of the power source must not 
exceed the maximum rated operating voltage, 250 V. 

Before making connection to the power source, check that the LINE 
VOLTAGE SELECTOR is set to match the voltage of the power 
source and has a suitable two-pole, three-terminal grounding-type 
plug. 



2-4 



Operating Information 






Operating Information 



Power Cord 
Information 



A power cord with appropriate plug configuration is supplied with each 
instrument. Table 2-1 , Power-Cord Conductor Identification, gives the color- 
coding of the conductors in the power cord. If you require a power cord 
other than the one supplied, refer to Figure 2-2, Power-Cord Plug Identifica- 
tion. 



Table 2-1 : Power-Cord Conductor Identification 



Conductor 


Color 


Alternate Color 


Ungrounded (Line) 


Brown 


Black 


Grounded (Neutral) 


Light Biue 


White 


Grounded (Earth) 


GreenAfeliow 


Green 




standard* 
North American 
115V 



Option A1 
Universai Euro 
230V 





Option A3 
Austraiian 
230V 




Option A4* 
North American 
230V 




230V 




Option 1A* 
North American 
115V/High Power 



Option IB 
North American 
3-Phase 



* Canadian Standards Association certification 
inciudes these power piugs for use in the 
North American power network 



Figure 2-2: Power-Cord Plug Identification 



11801C Service Manual 



2-5 




Operating Information 



Memory Backup 
Power 



There are four batteries within the instrument that allow the retention of 
volatile memory upon loss of the AC power source. These self-contained 
power sources provide memory backup power to retain the following: 

■ front-panel settings 

■ stored settings 

■ stored waveforms 

■ Time & Date parameters 

■ Time Base Cal Constants (these are regenerated automatically if lost) 

■ the number of hours of instrument on-time, power-on sequences, and 
instrument serial number 

The batteries have a nominal shelf life of approximately five years. 



Operating 

Environment 



The following environmental requirements are provided so that you can 
ensure proper functioning and extend the operation of the instrument. 

Operating Temperature 

The instrument can be operated where the ambient air temperature is be- 
tween 0° C and -i-50° C and can be stored in ambient temperatures from 
-40° C to -1-75° C. After storage at temperatures outside the operating 
limits, allow the chassis to reach the safe operating temperature before 
applying power. 

Ventilation Requirements 

The fan draws air through the side panels of the instrument and blows air 
out through the rear to cool the instrument. To ensure that this cooling 
process occurs properly, allow at least two inches clearance on both sides 
and the rear of the instrument. The top and bottom of the instrument do not 
require ventilation clearance. 




If air flow is restricted, then the instrument’s power supply may 
temporarily shut down. 



2-6 



Operating Information 





Operating Information 



Packaging for 
Shipment 



If the instrument is to be shipped for long distances by commercial trans- 
portation, it should be packaged in the original manner. The carton and 
packaging material in which your instrument was shipped should be saved 
and used for this purpose. 

Also, if the instrument is to be shipped to a Tektronix service center for 
service or repair, attach a tag to the instrument showing the following: 

■ owner of the instrument (with address) 

■ name of person to contact at your firm 

■ complete instrument type and serial number 

■ if possible, furnish complete system firmware versions as displayed in 
the Instrument Options pop-up menu selected from the UTILITY major 
menu 

■ a description of the service required 

If the original packaging is unfit for use or not available, package the instru- 
ment as follows: 

r~l Step 1 : Obtain a corrugated cardboard shipping carton with a 

375-pound test strength and having inside dimensions at least six in- 
ches greater than the instrument dimensions. This allows for cushioning. 

I I Step 2: Wrap the instrument with polyethylene sheeting or equivalent 
material to protect the finish. 

I I Step 3: Cushion the instrument on all sides by tightly packing dunnage 
or urethane foam between the carton and the instrument, allowing three 
inches on each side. 

I I Step 4: Seal the carton with shipping tape or with an industrial stapler. 

I I steps: Mark the address of your local Tektronix service center and your 
return address on the carton in one or more prominent locations. 



11801C Service Manual 



2-7 





Operating Information 



2-8 



Operating Information 





Theory of Operation 



The Tektronix 11 801 C is a high-resolution digital sampling oscilloscope 
accommodating up to eight input channels through the dual-channel sam- 
pling heads. With the SD-24 TDR/Sampling Head, eight channels of single- 
ended TDR or four channels of differential TDR are available as well. 

Features include the following: 

■ sweep rates ranging from 5 ms/division to 1 ps/div 

■ autoset to provide a suitably adjusted display for viewing and further 
manual adjustment 

■ windows for viewing expanded sections of a trace 

■ self-tests to assure continuous accuracy of waveform data and measure- 
ments 

■ digital waveform storage and display 

■ on-board measurement capabilities 

■ menu-driven touch-screen operation 

■ RS-232-C, GPIB, and PRINTER interfaces 
This section has two main sub sections: 

■ System Functional Overview describes the major functional blocks of 
the 1 1 801 C and presents a typical waveform processing cycle 

■ Block Diagram Descriptions discusses the individual boards in the 
11801C 



11801C Service Manual 



3-1 





Theory of Operation 



3-2 



Theory of Operation 





System Functional Overview 



This section describes and illustrates the major functional blocks of the 
11801C (see Figure 9-1). 



Acquisition System 
Biock 



The 1 1801 C contains two identical Acquisition systems. Each Acquisition 
system supports two dual-channel sampling heads for four overall channels. 
However, each Acquisition system contains only two physical channels that 
can be used for data acquisition and measurement. 

Since each Acquisition system supports four input channels (two dual-chan- 
nel heads) but contains only two acquisition/measurement channels, the 
four input channels are multiplexed into the two acquisition/measurement 
channels through analog multiplexers. Any one of the four sampling head 
input channels can be independently connected to either of the two acquisi- 
tion/measurement channels. 

Several calibration signals are also supplied to each multiplexer, although 
these signals are used only for self-tests and diagnostics. 



Strobe Distribution 
Biock 



The Strobe Distribution block acts as an interface between the Time Base/ 
Controller and the Acquisition systems. 

The Time Base/Controller generates a strobe pulse that is regenerated by 
the Strobe Distribution block to drive all of the sampling heads in parallel. 



Tim© BaSO/Controiior The Time Base/Controller block is comprised of: 
Biock ■ a microprocessor with local RAM and ROM 



■ the time base and trigger circuits 

■ interfaces to the memory management unit (MMU) and Acquisition 
systems 



Triqqor Ssioct Biock Trigger select block selects the desired trigger signal to be sent to the 

Time Base/Controller block. 



11801C Service Manual 



3-3 





System Functional Overview 



Executive Processor 
Block 



After the user requests an operation (with a front panel control, for instance), 
the Executive Processor (EXP) directs the oscilloscope to perform this 
operation. Another primary function of the EXP is to execute diagnostic 
Self-Tests on the instrument when powering-on or at the user’s request. To 
control operations, the EXP controls and monitors the other circuit boards 
sharing the executive system bus. Through the executive bus boards, the 
EXP also indirectly controls all other instrument boards. The EXP generates 
commands and status signals to control on-board devices and I/O devices, 
such as GPIB and RS-232-C interfaces, that help process data and help 
control the rest of the instrument. 



Memory Management 
Unit Block 



The memory management unit (MMU) arbitrates requests for access to the 
Waveform Memory from the following three sources: 

■ the EXP 



■ the Time Base/Controller 

■ the display system 



This arbitration allows all three systems transparent access to the Waveform 
Memory. 



Wavoform Momory waveform Memory is shared among the following three processors: 

Block ■ the EXP 

■ the Display 

■ the Time Base/Controller 

While the main function of the Waveform Memory is the storage of waveform 
data and waveform related information, the shared memory is also used to 
pass messages between the Executive, Display, and Time Base/Controller 
processors. Eventually, all acquired waveforms are transferred from the 
Acquisition system memory to the Waveform Memory for display. 



3-4 



Theory of Operation 





System Functional Overview 



Front Panol Controls user control of the oscilloscope is primarily through the following three front 

panel controls: 

■ the front-panel major-menu buttons 

■ the touch panel 

■ the multifunction knobs 

The major menu buttons are the top level menu selections for the instru- 
ment. Touching an icon, menu item, or waveform selects that particular icon, 
menu item, or waveform, respectively. The multifunction knobs control the 
function of the particular item that is selected. 



I/Q Block block provides a GPIB port, RS-232-C port, and a PRINTER port for 

interfacing various I/O devices to the instrument. 



Waveform 
Compressor and 
Display Control Block 



The display subsystem provides all visual output to the user. This includes 
not only data output such as waveform traces, graticules, axes, and annota- 
tion, but displays supporting the human interface as well (which includes 
menus, labeling for touch panel input, and an interactive output to assist in 
operating the system; that is, the current mode-setting information). 



The oscilloscope uses a custom vertical raster-scan display that provides 
excellent resolution for both waveform display and text. The display system 
produces a display by: 

1 . transferring waveform data from the Waveform Memory 

2. compressing it into 512 horizontal pixels 

3. converting it to a format compatible with the vertical raster-scan display 

The Waveform Compressor takes waveforms with more than 512 data points 
and compresses these points into 512 groups. For example, for a 1024-point 
waveform, each group would contain two points; for 2048-point waveforms, 
each group would contain four points. The Waveform Compressor finds the 
largest and smallest vertical value in a group of points and then draws a 
vector between the maximum and minimum — even in “dots” mode. The 
only difference between dots and vectors is that in vector mode the vectors 
are extended vertically to meet the vector on the next scan line. 



11 801 C Service Manual 



3-5 





System Functional Overview 



Power Supply 

To apply power to the instrument: 

1 . Turn the rear panel PRINCIPAL POWER switch to ON. 

2. Turn the front panel ON/STANDBY switch to ON. 

A small green indicator lamp should light, indicating the power is on. 



The oscilloscope operates from either a 1 15 V or 230 V nominal line voltage 
source at a line frequency between 48 Hz and 440 Hz. The LINE VOLTAGE 
SELECTOR switch allows selection of AC line inputs of 90 V to 132 Vrms o'" 
180 V to 250 Vrms- 



Typical Waveform 
Processing Cycle 



The following is a brief overview of how the oscilloscope acquires, pro- 
cesses, and displays a waveform from the input channels: 

1 . Analog input signals are connected to the sampling head inputs. 

2. The Time Base/Controller block produces precisely timed strobe signals 
based on the trigger signal. 

3. These strobe signals are distributed to the sampling head channels and 
instruct the sampling heads when to take samples of the input signal. 

4. The Acquisition systems take the output of the sampling heads, amplify 
or attenuate the signals, and apply any offset based on the vertical size 
and position controls. 

5. The output of the amplifiers are applied to analog-to-digital (A/D) con- 
verters, which convert the sampled voltages to digital codes and then 
store these codes in the acquisition system memory. 

6. Once all the samples in a waveform have been acquired, the Time 
Base/Controller then transfers these samples from the Acquisition sys- 
tem memory to the Waveform Memory, through the waveform data 
direct memory access (DMA). 

7. The EXP processes information from the human interfaces (that is; the 
menus, icons, buttons, and knobs that you interact with to control the 
oscilloscope). 

8. The EXP sends commands to the display system so that the function 
that the user selected is displayed. 

9. When instructed by the EXR the display system receives the waveform 
data from waveform memory and converts it to a unique vertical raster- 
scan format for a display based on the user’s settings. 



3-6 



Theory of Operation 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



A1 M/F Strobe Drive 
Board 



This section describes the 11 801 C board level block diagrams (see the 
Diagrams section) . 



The A1 M/F Strobe Drive board consists of the following circuits: 

■ Data buffers circuitry 

■ Address latch circuitry 

■ Function decoder circuitry 

■ Internal clock rate generator circuitry 

■ Control buffers circuitry 

See Figure 9-2 for a block diagram of this board. 

Data Buffers 

This circuit buffers the A5 Time Base/Controller board’s address and data 
buses with bidirectional buffers, and the A5 Time Base/Controller board’s 
control lines with octal buffers. 

Address Latch 

This circuitry buffers and latches the address for the A5 Time Base/Control- 
ler board to use. 

Function Decoder 

This circuit partially decodes this latched address and enables the data 
buffers if the address is on this board or on the A24/A27 & A25/A28 Acquisi- 
tion system boards (controlled through this board). The function decoder 
also selects the appropriate direction of the data buffers to perform a read or 
write operation. 

Internal Clock Rate Generator 

This circuit is a 1 6-bit programmable counter that is tied to the ^ 2 flip-flop 
which produces the square wave output. The overall division ratio of this 
block can be programmed from 2^ to 2''^. The internal clock rate generator 
is programmed at power-on to provide a 100 kHz output, given a 4 MHz 
input on jumper J35. 



11801C Service Manual 



3-7 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



A3 M/F Power 
Connect Board 



A4 Regulator Board 



Control Buffer 

This circuit buffers the control signals sent to the At M/F Strobe Drive board 
from the A5 Time Base/Controller board. 



The A3 M/F Power Connector board consists of built-in connectors that 
connect the power supply voltages from the A4 Regulator board to the 
following boards: 

■ A1 M/F Strobe Drive board 

■ A5 Time Base/Controller board 

■ A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect board 

The A3 M/F Power Connect board also supplies ±15 V power to the A14 
Input/Output (I/O) board through a 16-pin ribbon cable. 



The regulators convert semi-regulated voltages into stabilized, low-ripple, 
output voltages. The A4 Regulator board consists of the following regulators 
and the voltage-fault detect circuitry: 

■ +50 V 

■ -15 V 

■ +5 V 

■ +15 V 

■ -50 V 

See Figure 9-3 for a block diagram of this board. 

The operational amplifiers used for the +50 V, +15 V, +5 V -50 V, -15 V, 
and -5 V regulators require that the following special voltages be generated 
for their operation: 

■ semi-regulated +54 V supply generates the +20 V supply 

■ semi-regulated -54 V supply generates the -20 V supply 

■ semi-regulated +54 V supply generates the + 1 0 V supply 

■ semi-regulated -54 V supply generates the - 1 0 V supply 

■ +10.0 REF is used as a reference voltage 

Voltage Fault Detect 

This circuit consists of two window comparators and associated resistors. 
This circuitry detects if any regulated supply is over-voltage or under-voltage. 
The associated resistors set a hysteresis window that is 5% of the regulator 
sense line voltages. 



3-8 



Theory of Operation 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



A5 Time 

Base/Controller 

Board 



The A5 Time Base Controller board consists of the following circuitry: 

■ Microprocessor (MPU) 

■ RAM/ROM 

■ Trigger circuitry 

■ Time Base circuitry 

■ Acquisition system interface 

■ Memory management unit (MMU) interface 
See Figure 9-4 for the block diagram of this board. 

Microprocessor 

The microprocessor controls the time base and trigger circuitry in response 
to commands from the Executive Processor, performs local on-line calibra- 
tion of the time base, schedules waveform acquisitions, and manages the 
Acquisition system and waveform data transfers. 

RAM/ROM Memory 

Both RAM and ROM memory reside within the microprocessor’s 1 Mbyte of 
address space. The upper 256 Kbytes is reserved as ROM, the lower 
1 28 Kbytes of static RAM is provided for dynamic data storage and local 
nonvolatile memory. There are 32 Kbytes of memory-provided communica- 
tion and waveform storage for the 1 1801C’s eight channels, and another 
32 Kbytes for the Strobe Distribution block of the oscilloscope and multiplex- 
ers. There are 512 Kbytes of memory assigned as communication and 
primary waveform storage. Another 32 Kbytes are used to map the commu- 
nication buffer of the parallel interface with the memory management unit, 
and the remaining 32 Kbytes are divided into I/O space and time base 
control. 



Trigger 

This circuit is comprised of the trigger recognizer and gated voltage control 
oscillator. The trigger circuits accept trigger signals from the trigger attenua- 
tor. The strobe sense signal and internal feedback signals are used in the 
Self-Tests diagnostic process but are not normally used for data acquisition. 

The trigger recognizer sees a valid direct trigger signal and outputs this 
signal to the voltage controlled oscillator which sets the timing for the strobe 
signal. 

The direct trigger input allows programmed slope, level, AC/DC, and X1/X10 
selection. 

If auto trigger mode is selected, the timebase will generate its own trigger 
signal after 20 ms. If normal trigger mode is selected, the 1 1 801 C will wait 
for trigger signals. 



11 801 C Service Manual 



3-9 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



The High Frequency On/Off Control selects the state of the trigger hysteresis 
in the trigger input path. 

High Frequency On removes trigger hysteresis and improves sensitivity 
when the trigger signal edge slew rate is 1 V/ns or greater, typically a 
320 mVp.p, 1 GHz sine wave. See Figure 3-1 . 

High Frequency Off retains trigger hysteresis while improving noise rejection 
at low frequencies, when the trigger edge slew rate is less than 1 V/ns. It 
can be used at any frequency if the trigger signal amplitude reliably triggers 
the 1 1 801 C. See Figure 3-1 . This is the default setting after initialization. 




Figure 3-1: Trigger Edge Slew Rate for High Frequency Seiection 



The Enhanced Triggering ON/Off Control selects the state of the metastable 
trigger rejection feature in the trigger input path. 

Enhanced Triggering On directs the timebase to detect metastable trigger 
events and reject the acquired data. The data is reacquired at the next 
trigger event. 

Enhanced Triggering Off allows the timebase to acquire and display metast- 
able trigger events. 

The Trigger Holdoff Control in the trigger menu programs the trigger holdoff 
value. 

Auto Holdoff is the default mode. This mode automatically programs Actual 
Holdoff to the minimum possible value. It depends only on the time base 
settings and is updated when the Main Size and Main Position values 
change. Triggering is held off to beyond the rightmost point in the Main 
record. The minimum value is 5 ps. The Actual Holdoff (auto mode) calcula- 
tion is: 

Actual Holdoff (auto mode) = max (5 ps, 5 ps-i-Main Pos-i- Duration) 
where Duration = Main SizexlO divisions. 



3-10 



Theory of Operation 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



Manual Holdoff extends the trigger holdoff to longer periods, up to 2.5 
seconds. The Actual Holdoff value depends on the value of Requested 
Holdoff in addition to the time base settings. The Actual Holdoff (manual 
mode) calculation is: 

Actual Holdoff (manual mode) = max (5 ps, 5 ps+Main Pos+Duration, 
Requested Holdoff) 

Time Base 

This circuit is a very precise slewing delay generator. It accepts triggers from 
the reference oscillator, generates a precise delay, and outputs a strobe- 
drive pulse. 

The time base circuitry consists of a TECL integrated circuit (1C), which 
contains three six-bit high-speed counters, and a CMOS 1C, which contains 
a 48-bit programmable strobe delay generator. 

On the first sample of the waveform, the sample is taken immediately after a 
starting delay. Subsequent samples are delayed by an small additional 
amount, called the dot delay. The dot delay is programmed and stored into 
the strobe delay register. Each sample is delayed by one delay more than 
the previous sample. The dot delay can vary from 1 0 fs to 20 ns depending 
on the horizontal size and the number of points in the waveform record. 

The sampling interval (incremental delay between samples) is the total 
acquisition time (time/division x 10 divisions) divided by the number of 
points acquired. 

Acquisition System Interface 

This circuit contains 16 Kbytes of RAM (physically located on the A25/A28 
Acquisition MPU board) that is shared between the Acquisition system and 
the Time Base/Controller. This RAM is mapped into the microprocessor 
memory space so that it can be accessed as any other RAM — either by the 
microprocessor, itself, or by the DMA controller. 

This shared memory allows the microprocessor to transfer waveforms from 
the Acquisition system to the Waveform Memory using DMA. It also provides 
a mailbox structure for commands and data passed between the two sys- 
tems. 

Memory Management (MMU) Interface 

This circuit interfaces the Time Base/Controller to the EXP and the Waveform 
Memory. This interface allows the EXP to send commands to the micropro- 
cessor through the Time Base/Controller and provides the path for waveform 
transfers from the Acquisition system to the Waveform Memory. 



11801C Service Manual 



3-11 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



yyy QRX S0Ck©t Board socket board is an interface from the A15 MMU board to the 

CRT. The A7 CRT Socket board consists of the following circuits: 

■ Red, Green, and Blue video amplifiers 

■ RED, GREEN, and BLUE cutoff adjustments 

■ CONVERGENCE adjustment 

See Figure 9-5 for a block diagram of this board. 

Red, Green, and Blue Video Amplifiers 

These three circuits are identical high speed video amplifiers that drive the 
three cathodes (R, G, and B; red, green, and blue, respectively) of the CRT. 
Each of the three colors can be programmed to display 64 different levels. 
This yields a possible 262,144 colors, of which eight can be displayed on 
the screen at any time. 

Red, Green, and Blue Adjustments 

These three potentiometers control the cutoff point; that is, the point at 
which a certain color becomes invisible. 

Convergence Adjustment 

This potentiometer controls the vertical convergence of the red, green, and 
blue deflection beams. 



3-12 



Theory of Operation 






Block Diagram Descriptions 



A8 CRT Driver Board 



The A8 CRT Driver board consists of the following circuits: 

■ Horizontal sweep circuitry 

■ Vertical sweep circuitry 

■ High voltage and grid voltage generator circuitry 

■ Degauss circuit 

■ Beam current limit circuit 

■ Grid bias circuit 

The A8 CRT Driver board circuitry drives the raster scan CRT. The VIDEO 
and SYNC signals from the At 5 MMU board generate the Z-axis signal, 
sweep signals, and grid bias voltages for the CRT. 

See Figure 9-6 for a block diagram of this board. 

Horizontal Sweep 

This circuit generates the sweep current for the horizontal deflection yoke. 
The horizontal driver includes an oscillator, a voltage ramp generator, a 
high-gain amplifier, and a flyback generator. These components provide 
sweep synchronization, horizontal deflection, and linearity. 

The horizontal adjustments, H-SIZE, H-POS, and H-LIN, allow you to opti- 
mize the appearance of the display. 

Vertical Sweep 

This circuit produces a deflection current that sweeps the video beam from 
the bottom to the top of the CRT. This circuit also produces a flyback signal 
for the flyback transformer that is in parallel with the deflection yoke. 

The vertical adjustments, VERT SIZE and VERT PCS, set the vertical size 
and position of the display. 

High Voltage and Grid Voltage Generator 

This circuit includes the flyback transformer which generates the 16 kV CRT 
anode potential and other bias voltages. This transformer is coupled and 
synchronized with the vertical deflection system. 

The SCREEN adjustment provides the cutoff point; that is, the point where 
no information is visible on the display screen. The FOCUS adjustment 
provides manual focusing of the display image. 



11 801 C Service Manual 



3-73 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



A9, A10, and A11 
Front Panel Boards 



Degauss 

This circuit removes magnetic fields from the color steel aperture grille. 
These magnetic fields are induced at each power-on by magnetic sources. 

The Degauss circuit produces an exponentially decaying sine wave with a 
frequency of approximately 3.7 kHz. This waveform is applied to the de- 
gauss coils that are located on both sides of the CRT. The decayed oscilla- 
tion through the coils causes a magnetic field to be induced in the CRT steel 
aperture grille. This magnetic field saturates the steel, and then forces the 
stored magnetic field down to zero as the steel is driven around its hystere- 
sis curve. 

Beam Current Limit 

This circuit limits the average power to the CRT to less than 15 W. An ampli- 
fier circuit compares the sum of the anode current and the FOCUS adjust- 
ment current to a reference current of 0.72 mA. If the sum of the two 
currents exceeds the reference current, then the three video amplifiers on 
the A7 CRT socket board are disabled. 

Grid Bias 

This circuit provides -40 V of grid bias to the A7 CRT Socket board. At 
power-off, the grid is supplied with -90 V until the focus circuit discharges a 
high voltage. This prevents a bright spot from appearing at the center of the 
screen at power-off. 



The A9, A10, and A1 1 Front-Panel Circuit boards specifically consist of the: 

■ A9 Touch Panel assembly 

■ A10 Front Panel Control board 

■ A1 1 Front Panel Button board 

Touch Panei, Major Menu Keys, and Menu Status LEDs 

These three functions interface to the Executive processor through a general 
purpose programmable keyboard and display controller 1C on the A10 Front 
Panel Controller board. 

The keyboard function of the 1C handles the touch matrix and hard keys. 

The display function drives the menu LED light bars. 

A9 Touch Panel Assembly 

This circuit is comprised of infrared LEDs that produce a matrix of light 
beams that are interrupted when the user touches a particular touch zone. 
The touch panel and hard key matrix are scanned continuously until a 
shadow or keypress is detected. When a hit is detected, that scan is com- 



3-14 



Theory of Operation 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



pleted and the interrupt line is asserted by the display controller. During this 
time the interrupt is active and no new data is written into the sensor RAM 
from the touch panel or hard keys even though the hardware continues to 
scan; therefore, the data will not change in the sensor RAM while the micro- 
processor is reading it. 

Only one infrared LED is turned on at a time and only the phototransistor 
directly opposite is selected to receive light. This prevents any crosstalk 
between emitter/detector pairs. 

A10 Front Panel Control Board 

This circuitry generates the 6-bit address bus that is used to select an in- 
frared LED and its compliment phototransistor on the A9 Touch Panel board. 

A1 1 Front Panel Button Board 

This circuitry is comprised of the major menu LED light bars which are 
driven by the display refresh register output of the A7 Display Controller 
board. Internally, there is a matrix of display RAM organized in an 8-bit by 
8-bit matrix. This display RAM is scanned column by column (automatically); 
lighting the appropriate LED bar(s) when a high bit is encountered. The 
coarse/fine LEDs are driven by a latch which is controlled by the EXR The 
coarse/fine selections are sensed on the A9 Touch Panel board. 



A12 Rear Panel 
Assembly 



The At 2 Rear Panel assembly links the oscilloscope to other devices. This 
assembly contains connectors for the following devices: 

■ One GPIB Port 

■ One RS-232-C Port 

■ One Printer Port (Centronics style) 

The At 2 Rear Panel assembly is controlled from the A14 Input/Output (I/O) 
board through a 40-wire cable. This cable carries the following signals: 

■ Eight-bit bidirectional data bus 

■ Four-bit address bus 

■ Four interrupt lines 

■ GPIB DMA request and grant lines 

■ Four device control lines 

■ Assorted power supply and ground lines 

See Figure 9-7 for a block diagram of this assembly. 



11801C Service Manual 



3-15 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



GPIB Data and Address Bus 

This bus drives the GPIB controller directly. Control signals DBIN, and WR 
are used by the GPIB controller to determine if the microprocessor is trying 
to read from or write to it. The interrupt controllers in the A17 Executive 
Processor board monitor this interrupt line and will signal the microproces- 
sor to service the GPIB controller. In order to communicate with the micro- 
processor, the GPIB controller requires that at least one of the following 
conditions occurs: 

■ the receiver section of the GPIB controller has a byte of data (Inbyte 
Register) from the GPIB bus that the microprocessor needs to read 

■ the transmitter section register (Outbyte Register) is empty and is ready 
to receive another byte of data 

■ the status of the GPIB bus or the GPIB controller has changed and the 
microprocessor has to be notified 

On the opposite side of the GPIB controller is another bus system. This 
other bus system includes an eight-bit data bus which accesses a bidirec- 
tional GPIB data buffer and an eight-bit control bus which accesses a GPIB 
control driver. The GPIB bus is connected to the opposite side of the buffer 
and control driver. These two devices are specially designed to be TTL 
signal-level compatible on the bus side of the buffer driver. 

The states of three control signals from the GPIB controller, SRQ, NRFD and 
NDAC, are monitored and displayed on the rear panel of the oscilloscope. 
These LEDs show the state that the GPIB controller is in, not the state of the 
GPIB bus. 

Two other signals of interest are GPIB RQ and GPIB GR. These signals are 
used by the DMA Controller on the A17 Executive Processor board to com- 
municate with the GPIB controller. The DMA can be programmed by the 
microprocessor to service either the Inbyte register or the Outbyte register. 

Standard RS-232-C Controller 

This communications controller is connected to the same data bus and 
address bus as the GPIB controller. The RPD7-RPD0 address lines transfer 
data to and from the microprocessor. The RPA1-RPA4 address lines are 
used by the microprocessor to select individual registers in the GPIB control- 
ler. The STD RS SEL line goes low when the microprocessor wants to com- 
municate with the RS-232-C controller. (This line also drives the Chip 
Enable.) 

The RD and WR signals are driven by the microprocessor to signal if the 
GPIB controller is to be read from or written into. The controller sets the STD 
RS INTR (interrupt) line low to request service from the microprocessor. The 
microprocessor writes a byte into the controller’s transmit buffer to transmit 
data on the RS-232-C bus. The microprocessor reads a byte from the receiv- 
er buffer to receive data from the RS-232-C bus. The microprocessor can 



3-16 



Theory of Operation 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



A13 Mother Board 



also read the status of the controller. The RS-232-C controller translates the 
parallel data from the microprocessor to serial data from RXD on the 
RS-232-C bus to parallel data for the microprocessor. 

There are transmit and receive buffers which are compatible with the 
RS-232-C bus. Clear To Send (CTS) and Data Set Ready (DSR) are 
RS-232-C control signals that can be controlled by the microprocessor. 
Request To Send (RTS) and Data Terminal Ready (DTR) are signals that can 
be read by the microprocessor. The Received Signal Detect (RSD) control 
signal is always high when power is on. This RS-232-C port is a DCE type. 

Printer Port 

The Centronics-style, J1 1 1 , printer port is controlled by a programmable 
peripheral interface IC. This IC has all the control lines necessary to connect 
to a microprocessor, plus two general purpose eight-bit ports and the con- 
trol signals to use them. The A12 Rear Panel Assembly Data bus and Ad- 
dress bus connect to the IC and have the same function as described for 
the GPIB and RS-232-C controllers. The Printer Sel line is set low by the 
microprocessor when it is communicating with the interface. The RD and 
WR lines allow the microprocessor to either read or write to the registers in 
the programmable peripheral interface IC. This IC must be initialized by the 
microprocessor for Port A to be a strobed input port. Port C provides the 
control signals. 



The A13 Mother board provides the interconnection for the microprocessor 
signals and the -i-5 V power among the following boards: 

■ A14 I/O board 

■ A15 Memory Management Unit (MMU) board 

■ A1 7 Executive Processor board 

■ A1 8 Memory board 



11801C Service Manual 



3-17 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



A14 Input/Output 
(I/O) Board 



The A14 I/O board contains the following circuits: 

■ Data buffers 

■ Timer configuration circuitry 

■ Real time clock 

■ Serial data interface (SDI) 

■ Temp/tone readback buffer 

■ Tone generator 

■ GPIB control circuitry 

See Figure 9-8 for a block diagram of this board. 

The A14 I/O board is an interface between the Executive Processor (EXP) 
and devices on the A9, A10, and A1 1 Front Panel boards, the A12 Rear 
Panel assembly, and on-board I/O devices. The EXP reads and writes to 
these I/O devices at specific I/O addresses. These I/O addresses are de- 
coded to produce device select signals which enable the addressed device. 
Each I/O device is located on I/O address boundaries of at least 100/,ex- 

The lower eight bits of the Executive data bus transmit data to and from the 
various I/O devices. Note that only one I/O device can be accessed at a 
time. 

I/O Data Buffer 

This circuit buffers the lower eight bits of the Executive data bus from P105. 
The output of the I/O data bus drives data to the following six on-board 
devices: 

■ I/O delayed data buffer 

■ Rear panel data buffer 

■ Front panel data buffer 

■ Tone generator 

■ Tone/temp readback buffer 

■ Timer configuration circuitry 

I/O Delayed Data Buffer 

This circuitry interfaces between the I/O data bus and the Write Delayed 
data bus. 



3-18 



Theory of Operation 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



Timer Configuration 

This circuitry is composed of a latch and three two-input data multiplexers 
built with discrete gates. When a byte of data on the I/O data bus is latched, 
some of the data bits individually configure counters 1 and 2, allowing the 
timer to accept different inputs for different system tasks. The operating 
system uses counter 0 as a real-time clock based on the 2 MHz CLK input 
from the clock generator, which is always operating at 8 MHz. 

Real Time Clock 

This clock and its oscillator circuit maintain the current time of day. The EXP 
sets the real time clock and also interrupts the Executive processor (EXP) 
every one second to request the EXP to read the time. 

Serial Data Interface (SDI) 

This circuitry is a custom IC that interfaces the EXP to both front panel 
knobs. The EXP controls this IC, and this IC interrupts the EXP when a 
device requires service. 

Tone Generator 

This circuitry utilizes a DAC and a timer. The timer is equipped with a special 
current switch and capacitor to set the timer’s frequency. The timer outputs 
a square wave whose frequency is inversely proportional to the digital value 
written to the temp/tone DAC. Thus, if a zero value is input to the DAC, the 
tone generator produces the highest tone. 

Temp/Tone Readback Buffer 

This circuit is an eight-line buffer connected to the I/O data bus. The EXP 
uses this buffer to monitor the tone generator. 



11 801 C Service Manual 



3-19 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



A15 Memory 
Management (MMU) 
Board 



The A15 MMU board consists of the following circuits: 

■ MMU 1C 

■ Waveform RAM 

■ Display interface 

■ Time Base/Controller interface 

■ Executive processor (EXP) interface 

■ Display 1C 

■ Microprocessor 

■ Bit map RAM 

■ Waveform display RAM circuitry 

■ Video DAC 

The A15 MMU board coordinates communications among the following 
three oscilloscope subsystems: 

■ Display 

■ Time Base/Controller 

■ Executive 

See Figure 9-9 for a block diagram of this board. 



MMU 1C 

This circuit controls all data transfers to and from waveform RAM. The MMU 
gate array controls high-speed transfers of waveform data and communica- 
tion messages between waveform RAM and the three subsystem interfaces: 
the Display, Time Base/Controller, and Executive processors. A set of hand- 
shaking lines designed to the DMA facilities of each particular subsystem 
coordinates each subsystem interface. 



Waveform RAM 

This memory consists of 512 Kbytes of RAM. The RAM holds waveform data 
and messages that are read and written by the Time Base/Controller, Dis- 
play, and Executive subsystems. 

Display Interface 

Data is transferred to and from the Display subsystem and to and from the 
MMU 1C through the Display Interface. The data is buffered with the bidirec- 
tional display data buffers. 



3-20 



Theory of Operation 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



Time Base/Controller Interface 

Data is transferred to and from the Time Base/Controller subsystem and to 
and from the MMU 1C through this interface. 

Executive Processor (EXP) Interface 

This circuit consists of bidirectional buffers, address mapping programmable 
array logic (PAL), and interface timing control PALs. This circuitry directs 
data flow to the EXP from the MMU 1C and vice versa. 

Display 1C 

This component consists of the following functional circuits: 

■ CRT controller 

■ Video output circuitry 

■ Compressor circuit 

The basic function of the CRT Controller is to produce VIDEO and SYNC 
signals that indicate to the CRT where to position video information. The 
controller is virtually automatic in operation and invisible to the firmware 
programmer except for several internal registers that must be initialized at 
power-on. 

The video output circuitry is where the hardware recognizes and displays 
specific data structures while the raster-scan CRT displays the contents of 
the bit map. 

During the refresh of the screen, the hardware acquires bit map data along 
with waveform display data to yield a final color index. 

The compressor circuit receives a waveform composed of several possible 
numbers of data points and outputs 512 pairs (one minimum and one 
maximum) to the display. 

Microprocessor 

The microprocessor transforms the entire Display subsystem into an intelli- 
gent peripheral dedicated to operating the display. The firmware that con- 
trols the Display subsystem executes from ROM in the microprocessor’s 
address space. The clock for this microprocessor operates at a frequency of 
8 MHz. 

Bit Map RAM 

This memory consists of 256 Kbytes of RAM, divided into 4-bit planes of 
65,536 bytes each. Three of the bit planes are for text and the remaining bit 
plane is for XY, variable persistence, and infinite persistence. Each bit in a 
plane represents a single pixel of the display. Setting the representative pixel 
bit in each of the planes controls the color or intensity. 



11801C Service Manual 



3-21 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



Waveform Display RAM 

This memory consists of 65,536 bytes. These bytes contain the minimum/ 
maximum pairs of values, color index, and overrange/underrange informa- 
tion. 

Video Digital-to-Analog Convertor (DAC) 

This circuitry converts the digital data from the Display 1C into analog data 
for the A7 CRT Socket board. 



A1 7 Executive 
Processor Board 



See Figure 9-1 0 for a block diagram of this board. 

Executive Processor (EXP) 

This microprocessor executes firmware routines stored in EPROMS that are 
located on the A1 8 Memory board to control the operation of the oscillo- 
scope. Along with the numeric coprocessor, the EXP does all data proces- 
sing not directly related to generating the display or digitizing the waveform. 
When power is first applied to the oscilloscope, the EXP executes local and 
system diagnostic tests, which are located in the EPROMs on the A18 
Memory board. 

The EXP performs these functions with the following three main circuits: 

■ the clock generator creates the timing signals and synchronized reset 
signals for the microprocessor 

■ the microprocessor reads and writes data, generates addresses for I/O 
and memory devices, and generates status signals for the bus controller 

■ the bus controller interprets the microprocessor’s status signals and 
generates the necessary bus control signals for the Executive bus 

Address decoders, address latches, and data buffers are all support circuits 
for I/O operations. 



The A1 7 Executive Processor board consists of the following circuitry: 

■ Executive processor (EXP) 

■ Numeric coprocessor circuitry 

■ Bus buffer circuitry 

■ Preset circuitry 

■ Wait state circuitry 

■ Interrupt controllers 

■ DMA Controller 



3-22 



Theory of Operation 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



Numeric Coprocessor 

This coprocessor is a high-speed floating-point processor that executes 
instructions in parallel with the EXR The EXP programs and controls the 
numeric coprocessor as an I/O device at addresses 0F8/,ex to 0FF/,gx- 

Bus Controller 

This circuit consists of a data buffer, an address buffer, and a control buffer 
that provide command and control signals from the microprocessor to the 
three Executive buses. The Executive buses consist of the following: 

The system data bus — is a bidirectional bus. It allows the microprocessor 
to fetch instructions from memory, and also to write data to memory and 
read data from memory. The memory that the microprocessor uses is lo- 
cated on the A18 Memory board. 



The system address bus — carries the address of a device when the 
microprocessor is requesting access to that device. Once the microproces- 
sor has access, the addressed device can then respond to the microproces- 
sor. 

The system control bus — carries control signals sent by the microproces- 
sor. These control signals are sent to the devices that the microprocessor 
addresses so that the devices can respond at the proper moment in the bus 
cycle. 

Reset 

This circuitry generates synchronized ready and reset control signals. 

Walt State 

This circuitry extends the bus cycle so that slower devices have sufficient 
time to read or write data. 

Interrupt Controllers 

These circuits constantly monitor the EXP’s interrupt lines to ensure that the 
highest priority interrupt gets serviced first. The Interrupt controllers provide 
the ability to assign priority levels to all the system’s interrupt lines and, 
conversely, to ignore (mask) any of the interrupt lines as well. 

DMA Controller 

This circuitry shortens the GPIB transfer time and also the transmission time 
of waveforms through the GPIB. 



11 801 C Service Manual 



3-23 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



A1 8 M6rnorv Board Memory Board provides the Executive processor (EXP) with system 

RAM (SRAM), Nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM), and EPROM for most operations. 
Support circuitry for the memories and diagnostic circuitry for troubleshoot- 
ing are located on-board. All accesses to SRAM, NVRAM, or EPROMs are 
initiated by the A17 Executive Processor board (specifically by the EXP or 
the DMA controller). Refer to the discussion of the At 7 Executive Processor 
board, earlier in this section, for bus cycle timing information. 

The A1 8 Memory board consists of the following circuitry: 

■ Address latches 

■ Address decode and memory select circuitry 

■ EPROM and system RAM 

■ Memory data buffers 

■ Wait state generator 

■ Wait state diagnostics 

■ Memory configuration readback 

■ Nonvolatile RAM and battery backup 

See Figure 9-1 1 for a block diagram of this board. 

Address Latches 

This circuitry buffers and holds the address lines for the EPROMs, SRAMs, 
NVRAMs, and other on-board devices until the end of the bus cycle. 



Address Decode and Memory Select 

This circuitry consists of a programmable array logic (PAL) device that 
decodes the address lines to produce five RAM select signals (DCS4-8) and 
four EPROM select signals (DCSO-3). DCS8 enables the SRAM while 
DCS4-7 enable the NVRAM. All EPROM and RAM select lines are latched, 
and the latch outputs are normally enabled. While the latch enable signal is 
high, the latch outputs are responsive to changes on the inputs; while the 
latch enable signal is low, the select lines are latched. 

The EXP on the A17 Executive Processor board generates the address line 
inputs, A1 4-A1 9. Depending upon the position of a jumper on the A1 7 
Executive Processor board, address lines A20-A23 can be memory bank-se- 
lect lines or microprocessor address lines. 

The memory select circuitry provides latched memory select lines and an 
enable signal for the memory data buffers. 



3-24 



Theory of Operation 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



EPROMs, SRAM, and NVRAM 

The memory includes EPROMs, System RAM (SRAM), and Nonvolatile RAM 
(NVRAM). The EPROMs contain all of the operating system code and diag- 
nostics code for the EXP All the memories share the latched address bus. 
The SRAM stores miscellaneous constants that the operating system code 
uses and produces. The NVRAM contains stored settings, stored traces, 
and other nonvolatile parameters. The memories are organized into high 
and low-byte pairs. The address decode PAL generates latched chip-select 
signals. A separate latched chip-select signal selects each of these pair. The 
memory data buffers buffer the data lines to the Executive data bus. 

Memory Data Buffers 

These ICs drive data between the memories and Executive data bus. Both 
eight-bit buffers are enabled when all of their inputs are high. 

Wait State Generator 

This circuit allows the EXP to access memory devices when the EXP is 
operating at faster clock frequencies. When the EXP is operating at frequen- 
cies greater than 8 MHz, the bus cycle time is too short to allow reads or 
writes to the present memory devices. The wait state generator sets the 
SRDY line (see Figure 9-10) on the Executive bus low to signal the EXP to 
lengthen the bus cycles. 

The wait state generator also contains a circuit to generate control signals 
(similar to those on the Executive bus). These control signals are early 
address latch (ELATCH), early memory write control (EMWTC), and early 
memory read control (EMRDC). 

Wait State Diagnostics 

This firmware routine measures the time interval that the wait state generator 
generates when a one (1) is written to I/O address 8020^ex- This causes the 
wait state diagnostics to connect the SRDY signal to the DIAGNSIG line on 
the Executive bus. A timer on the A14 I/O board can then measure the 
length of the wait. 

Memory Configuration Readback 

This circuitry allows the diagnostics to read the position of the memory 
configuration straps and the bank address lines. One bit of the readback 
data byte also indicates if the battery is at 2.5 V (an early warning of a low 
battery). The EXP performs an I/O read at address 8040/,gx to read this 
information. 

Battery Backup 

These batteries provide standby power to the nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM) 
during the powered-off periods of the oscilloscope. 



11801C Service Manual 



3-25 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



A19 Strobe/TDR 
Buffer Board 



The A19 Strobe/TDR buffer board is comprised of the following three main 
circuits: 

■ Strobe sense select circuitry 

■ Strobe deskew circuitry 

■ TDR buffer and level shift circuitry 

See Figure 9-1 2 for a block diagram of this board. 



Strobe Sense Select 

This circuit consists of five signal diodes (these diodes are normally off). The 
diodes carry the four sampling signals (J1 A, J2A, J3A, J4A) from the four 
sampling heads, and the reference strobe signal. When a particular diode is 
biased on, it allows the selected strobe sense signal to continue out of 
jumper J32. 

Strobe Deskew 

This circuit corrects the time delay between the sampling strobe signals 
which may occur from the mismatch in the external cabling or in the internal 
cables that distribute the strobe. The repositioning is done with the strobe 
deskew voltages, which are DC control voltages found on jumper J34. 
(Power is also supplied to this board through this jumper.) The strobe des- 
kew voltages are generated on the A1 M/F Strobe Drive board and are 
controlled by the microprocessor on the A5 Time Base/Controller board. The 
sampling strobe alignment is checked by routing the strobe sense signals to 
the A5 Time Base/Controller board where the microprocessor measures and 
adjusts the time alignment of each sampling head. 

TDR Buffer and Level Shift 

This circuitry consists of an ECL buffer and four dual-transistors that level- 
shift the TDR signal for proper drive of the TDR step generators in the sam- 
pling heads. 



A20-23 Head 
Interconnect Boards 



The A20-A23 Head Interconnect boards provide the interface between the 
sampling head connectors (J11, J12, J13, J14), the ribbon cable W150, and 
the coaxial cables W100 and W200. W150 connects to the A26 M/F Acquisi- 
tion Interface board and carries the control status and power. W100 and 
W200 connect to the A24/A27 Acquisition Analog board and carry the sig- 
nals from the sampling heads. 



3-26 



Theory of Operation 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



A26 M/F Acquisition 
interconnect Board 



The A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect board provides and distributes the 
power to the interconnections between the following boards: 

■ A24/A27 Acquisition Analog board 

■ A25/A28 Acquisition MPU board 

■ A20-A23 Head Interconnect boards 

See Figure 9-13 for the block diagram of this board. 

The A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect board also has a precision voltage 
reference (V) to furnish the ±5 V reference required by the A24/A27 Acquisi- 
tion Analog board. 



A24/A27 & A25/A28 
Acquisition System 
Boards 



The Acquisition system consists of four boards: the A24/A27 Acquisition 
Analog boards and the A25/A28 Acquisition MPU boards. 

The A24/A27 Acquisition Analog board consists of the following major 
blocks: 

■ Programmable gain amplifiers 

■ A/D converters 

■ Measurement hardware 

■ Timing and sampling head control 

The A25/A28 Acquisition Analog board consists of the following major 
blocks: 

■ Shared RAM 

■ Tme base/controller interface 

■ Microprocessor 

■ Measurement hardware 

■ Timing and sampling head control 

See Figures 9-14 and 9-15 for the block diagrams of these boards. 



Programmable Gain Amplifiers 

The four sampling head outputs are multiplexed to two amplifier channels 
through the input multiplexer. The microprocessor selects a sampling head 
channel to be acquired and connects it to one of the amplifier channels. The 
programmable gain amplifier then applies offset (Vert Pos) and amplifies or 
attenuates the signal (Vert Size). The output of the amplifier is applied to the 
analog to digital (A/D) converter for conversion to digitized data. 



11801C Service Manual 



3-27 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



A/D Convertors 

The output of each programmable gain amplifier is applied to an eight-bit 
flash A/D converter. The converter compares its analog input to two refer- 
ence voltages (-1-1 V REF and -1 V REF) and outputs an eight-bit binary 
number that indicates the relative value of the analog input signal in relation 
to the reference voltages. The digital output from the A/D converters is 
stored in the shared RAM and made available for transfer to the Waveform 
Memory through the Time Base/Controller. 

Measurement Hardware 

This circuitry has the selected sampling head output from the input multi- 
plexer applied to a precision strobed voltage comparator. This voltage 
comparator compares the sampling head output voltage to a reference 
voltage generated by a 14-blt digital-to-analog converter (DAC). The 
comparator output is then filtered by a filter and transition counter circuit on 
the A25/A28 Acquisition MPU board to remove false transitions generated by 
noise and to count the transitions. 

When the processor requests a hardware timing measurement such as a 
propagation delay measurement, the comparator is programmed for the 
appropriate measurement level and the transition counter is programmed to 
locate the selected transition number and slope. The hardware counts the 
strobe pulses that occur from the beginning of the acquisition to the point 
where the selected transition occurs. This operation is performed on two 
channels — one for each crossing point of the timing measurement. When 
the transition points are found, the Acquisition processor reads the sample 
number from the hardware and stores it in a specific location in the shared 
memory for the Time Base/Controller. The Time Base/Controller reads these 
points (from each channel involved in the measurement), subtracts these 
points, and then multiplies the result by the sampling interval. The result is a 
measurement of the time between two threshold points. 

Timing and Sampiing Head Controi 

This hardware generates analog control voltages that control several sam- 
pling head operation and calibration parameters. For example, the loop gain 
calibration adjustment is controlled by an analog voltage generated in the 
oscilloscope for each sampling head channel. In addition, three digital 
control lines go to each sampling head — two to enable or disable TDR on 
each channel and one to enable smoothing for both channels in a head. 

This circuit block also generates timing signals that control when waveform 
data is digitized and when the measurement hardware is clocked. The time 
base sends a strobe pulse to the acquisition system and to the sampling 
head to initiate a sample. Each acquisition processor can also generate 
strobe pulses locally for Self-Tests and diagnostic purposes. 



3-28 



Theory of Operation 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



Shared RAM 

The memory for the A25/A28 Acquisition MPU board contains 16 Kbytes of 
shared RAM. This memory is arbitrated on the A25/A28 Acquisition MPU 
boards between the Acquisition system processor, the Time Base/Controller 
processor, and the A/D converters on the A24/A27 Acquisition Analog 
board. All waveform data acquired by the Acquisition system, as well as 
control and data messages passed between the Acquisition system and the 
Time Base/Controller, pass through this shared memory. 

Time Base/Controller Interface 

This circuitry handles requests from the Time Base/Controller to access the 
shared memory on the A25/A28 Acquisition MPU boards. The shared 
memory is then arbitrated and buffered through the Time Base/Controller 
interface hardware. This hardware decodes and latches the Time Base/Con- 
troller address and generates a wait signal that holds the Time Base/Control- 
ler processor in a wait state until a bus cycle can be granted to allow the 
memory access to complete. 

The arbitration logic coordinates requests for access to the shared memory 
from the A/D converters, the Acquisition system processor, and the Time 
Base/Controller processor. 

Microprocessor 

The microprocessor controls the Acquisition system, which has 64 Kbytes of 
EPROM for code storage, 16 Kbytes of shared RAM and 8 Kbytes of un- 
shared RAM. The microprocessor calibrates and manages the program- 
mable gain amplifiers and measurement hardware. The microprocessor also 
accepts and executes commands from the Time Base/Controller processor 
and manages the sampling head digital and analog controls, including 
scanning the front panel SELECT buttons on the sampling head and driving 
the front panel LEDs. 



11 801 C Service Manual 



3-29 





Block Diagram Descriptions 



3-30 



Theory of Operation 





Performance Verification 



This section contains procedures to check electrical specifications and 
examine measurement limits listed in Table 4-1 . Use these procedures to 
check the oscilloscope operation following repair. To functionally test the 
oscilloscope, simply perform the procedures listed in Table 4-1 which have a 
“yes” indication in the Functional Test column. The Specifications or Mea- 
surement Limits are given at the beginning of each procedure. Adjustment 
procedures are included in the Adjustment section. Refer to the 11801C 
Digital Sampling Oscilloscope User Manual for more information about 
oscilloscope specifications and operation. The Setup in each procedure 
provides information concerning test equipment setup or interconnection. 
Refer to Table 4-2 for more information concerning test equipment used in 
the setups. 

Most Performance Verification and Adjustment procedures can be run in any 
order. However, the Sampling Head Calibration must always precede other 
procedures which use an operational sampling head (i.e., does not apply to 
parts using the Calibration Head). Also, if a different sampling head is used, 
then a sampling head calibration is required for each additional sampling 
head. 



Table 4-1: Measurement Limits, Specifications, and Functional Tests 



Part and Description 


Measurement 
Limits (Examine) 


Specifications 

(Check) 


Functional 

Test 


Power-On Diagnostics 


none 


none 


yes 


Sampling Head 


none 


none 


yes 


Extended Diagnostics 


none 


none 


yes 


Vertical Reference Voltage 


none 


-1-5 V ±200 pV and 
-5 V ±200 pV 


no 


Horizontal Reference Clock 


none 


200,000 kHz ±5 kHz 


no 


Vertical Accuracy 








Vertical Gain 


none 


±1.0% full scale 


yes 


Offset Accuracy 


none 


±2 mV 


yes 


Vertical Linearity 


none 


±1% 


no 


System Vertical RMS Noise 


200 pV at 2 mV/div 
500 pV at 5 mV/div 
1 mV at 10 mV/div 
632 pV at 20 mV/div 
1 .58 mV at 500 mV/div 
3.16 mV at 100 mV/div 
6.32 mV at 200 mV/div 


none 


yes 



11801C Service Manual 



4-1 















Performance Verification 



Table 4-1 : Measurement Limits, Specifications, and Functionai Tests (Cont.) 



Part and Description 


Measurement 
Limits (Examine) 


Specifications 

(Check) 


Functional 

Test 


Sweep Rate Accuracy 


0.05% at 2 ns/div 
0.08% at 1 ns/div 
0.8% at 100 ps/div 
2.5% at 10 ps/div 
10% at 1 ps/div 


none 


yes 


Triggering 






yes 


300 MHz Sensitivity 


100 mVp.pat300 MHz 


1 00 mV stable display 




1000 MHz Sensitivity 


100 mVp.pat 1000 MHz 


100 mV stable display 




3.0 GHz Sensitivity 


100 mVp_p at 3.0 GHz 


100 mV stable display 




Internal Clock 






yes 


Rise Time 


<2.5 ns 


<2.5 ns 




Frequency 


100 kHz ±3% 


100 kHz ±3% 




Duty Cycle 


50% ±3% 


50% ±3% 




Prescaler 


800 mVp_p at 2 GHz 


800 mV stable display 


yes 




600 mVp_p at 3 GHz 


600 mV stable display 






600 mVp.p at 10 GHz 


600 mV stable display 




Calibrator Output 






yes 


Rise Time (typical) 


250 ps 


250 ps 




Peak-to-peak Amplitude 


250 mV ±10% 


250 mV ±10% 





4-2 



Performance Verification 
















Performance Verification 



Test Equipment 



Table 4-2 (Test Equipment), contains suggested test equipment for use in 
this section. Procedure steps are based on the test equipment examples 
given, but you may substitute other equipment with similar specifications. 
The use of different equipment may alter test results, setup information, and 
related connectors and adapters. 

Table 4-2: Test Equipment 



Description 


Minimum 

Specification 


Examples of Applicable 
Test Equipment 


High Frequency 
Sine Wave Genera- 
tor 


10 MHz to 10 GHz 


WILTRON 6759B Opt 2 


Sampling Head 


SD-Series 


SD-24 and any other Tektronix 
SD-Series Sampling Head ex- 
cept SD-14 


Digital Voltmeter 
(w/test leads) 


<0.005% Accuracy 


FLUKE 8842A Digital Voltmeter 


Frequency Counter 


One Part in 
1 ,000,000 Accuracy 


Tektronix DC 5010 Universal 
Counter/Timer with a 
TM 5000-Series Power Module 


Calibration Head 




Tektronix Calibration Head 
067-1413-00 


Precision Voltage 
Source 




DATA PRECISION 8200 


Test Terminal 


any GPIB 
(IEEE- 1978) con- 
troller, or ASCII 
terminal equipped 
with an RS-232-C 
port. 

Requires compat- 
ible RS-232-C serial 
interface cable 


IBM compatible PC with termi- 
nal emulation software 


Coaxial Cable, 50 Q 
(3 required) 


50 Q, 36-inch, male 
BNC connectors 


Tektronix Part 012-0482-00 


Coaxial Cable, RF 


RF cable, 12 in., 
SMA connectors 


Tektronix Part 174-1364-00 




RF cable, 8.5 in., 
SMA connectors 


Tektronix Part 174-1120-00 



11801C Service Manual 



4-3 



Performance Verification 



Table 4-2: Test Equipment (Cent.) 



Description 


Minimum 

Specification 


Examples of Applicable 
Test Equipment 


Adapters 


BNC female-to-male 
Dual Banana 


Tektronix Part 103-0090-00 




BNC male-to-female 
Dual Banana 


Tektronix Part 103-0035-00 




SMA male-to-BNC 
female (8 required) 


Tektronix Part 015-1018-00 




SMA female-to-BNC 
male 


Tektronix Part 013-0126-00 




SMA male-to-N 
male 


Tektronix Part 015-0369-00 


Power Divider, 50 Q 


6 dB load isolation, 
50 Q, SMA 
connectors 


Tektronix Part 015-1014-00 


Termination, 50 Q 


Impedance, 50 Q; 
accuracy within 2%; 
SMA connectors 


Tektronix Part 015-1022-00 


Attenuator, 10X 


20 dB attenuation, 
50 Q, one male and 
one female 


Tektronix Part 01 1 -0059-02 


Attenuator, 2X 


50 Q, SMA, one 
male and one 
female 


Tektronix Part 015-1001 -00 


Power Supplies 
Troubleshooting 
Fixture 




Tektronix 067-1264-00 
Extended Diagnostics 
1 1000-Series Power Supplies 
troubleshooting fixture 


Probe, 10X 


Attenuation 1 0X 


Tektronix P6106A 


Pickoff, 10X 




Picosecond Pulse Labs 5520A 


Power Meter 




HP 436A 


Power Sensor 




HP 8485A 


Alignment Tool 


Plastic hex 


Tektronix Part 003-0301 -00 




Insulated slot 


Tektronix Part 003-0675-01 




Square Tip 
(ceramic) 


Tektronix Part 003-1400-00 


Magnetic Screw- 
driver 


Holder for Torx 
head tips 


Tektronix Part 003-0293-00 



4-4 



Performance Verification 




Performance Verification 



Table 4-2: Test Equipment (Cent.) 



Description 


Minimum 

Specification 


Examples of Applicable 
Test Equipment 


Torx Head Screw- 
driver 


#10 tip 


Tektronix Part 003-0814-00 




#15 tip 


Tektronix Part 003-0966-00 




#20 tip 


Tektronix Part 003-0866-00 


External Loopback 
Connector 


RS-232-C 

connector 


Tektronix Part 013-0198-00 


Shorting Strap 


two alligator clips 
on a short pigtail 
conductor 




Integrated Circuit 
Extracting Tool 


1C Insertion-Extrac- 
tion Pliers, 28-pin 
type 


General Tool P/N U505BG or 
equivalent 


Board Removal 
Tools 


Straight-slot screw- 
driver, large 






Torx-drive screw- 
driver. 

T-7, T-8, T-10, T-15, 
T-20, T-25 






Allen (hex) Wrench, 
1/1 6-inch 






Nutdrivers, 
3/16-inch, 1/4-inch, 
7/16-inch 






Needle-nose pliers 




Small Ruler 


half inch rulings 




Antistatic wrist strap 




Tektronix Part 006-3415-04 



11801C Service Manual 



4-5 












Performance Verification 



Test Record 

Photocopy the next four pages and use them to record the performance test 
results for your instrument. 



4-6 



Performance Verification 




Performance Verification 



1 1 801 C Test Record 



ln?;tn impnt Rprial Niimhpr- 


nprtifinatp Niimhpr- 




Temperature: 


RH %: 




Date of Calibration: 


Technician: 






Performance Test 


Minimum incoming Outgoing 


Maximum 


Vertical Accuracy 



Vertical Gain, First Compartment Acquisition Measurement: ± 1 .2% at checkpoint 

Channel 1 



5 mV/div 


-20.5 mV 


-19.5 mV 


10 mV/d iv 


-41.0 mV 


-39.0 mV 


20 mV/div 


-82 mV 


-78 mV 


50 mV/div 


-205 mV 


-195 mV 


100 mV/div 


-410 mV 


-390 mV 


200 mV/div 


-820 mV 


-780 mV 


5 mV/div 


19.5 mV 


20.5 mV 


10 mV/d iv 


39.0 mV 


41.0 mV 


20 mV/div 


78 mV 


82 mV 


50 mV/div 


195 mV 


205 mV 


100 mV/div 


390 mV 


410 mV 


200 mV/div 


780 mV 


820 mV 



11801C Service Manual 



4-7 








Performance Verification 



1 1 801 C Test Record (Cont.) 





Performance Test 


Minimum 


incoming Outgoing 


Maximum 


Vertical Gain 


1 , First Compartment Acquisition Measurement: 


± 1 .2% at checkpoint 




Channel 2 










Step 1 1 . 


5 mV/div 


-20.5 mV 




-19.5 mV 




10 mV/d iv 


-41.0 mV 




-39.0 mV 




20 mV/div 


-82 mV 




-78 mV 




50 mV/div 


-205 mV 




-195 mV 




100 mV/div 


-410 mV 




-390 mV 




200 mV/div 


-820 mV 




-780 mV 




5 mV/div 


19.5 mV 




20.5 mV 




10 mV/d iv 


39.0 mV 




41.0 mV 




20 mV/div 


78 mV 




82 mV 




50 mV/div 


195 mV 




205 mV 




100 mV/div 


390 mV 




410 mV 




200 mV/div 


780 mV 




820 mV 


Vertical Offset Accuracy, First Compartment 




±2 mV 




Step 10. 


400 mV 


398 mV 




402 mV 


Step 1 1 . 


1 V 


0.998 V 




1 .002 V 




2 V 


1 .998 V 




2.002 V 




-400 mV 


-402 mV 




-398 mV 




-1 V 


-1.002 V 




-0.998 V 




-2 V 


-2.002 V 




-1.998 V 



4-8 



Performance Verification 








Performance Verification 



1 1 801 C Test Record (Cont.) 





Performance Test 


Minimum 


Incoming 


Outgoing 


Maximum 


Vertical Gain 


1 , Third Compartment Acquisition Measurement: 


± 1 .2% at checkpoint 




Channel 1 












Step 1 1 . 


5 mV/div 


-20.5 mV 






-19.5 mV 




10 mV/d iv 


-41.0 mV 






-39.0 mV 




20 mV/div 


-82 mV 






-78 mV 




50 mV/div 


-205 mV 






-195 mV 




100 mV/div 


-410 mV 






-390 mV 




200 mV/div 


-820 mV 






-780 mV 




5 mV/div 


19.5 mV 






20.5 mV 




10 mV/d iv 


39.0 mV 






41.0 mV 




20 mV/div 


78 mV 






82 mV 




50 mV/div 


195 mV 






205 mV 




100 mV/div 


390 mV 






410 mV 




200 mV/div 


780 mV 






820 mV 


Vertical Gain, Third Compartment Acquisition Measurement: 


± 1 .2% at checkpoint 




Channel 2 












Step 1 1 . 


5 mV/div 


-20.5 mV 






-19.5 mV 




10 mV/d iv 


-41.0 mV 






-39.0 mV 




20 mV/div 


-82 mV 






-78 mV 




50 mV/div 


-205 mV 






-195 mV 




100 mV/div 


-410 mV 






-390 mV 




200 mV/div 


-820 mV 






-780 mV 




5 mV/div 


19.5 mV 






20.5 mV 




10 mV/d iv 


39.0 mV 






41.0 mV 




20 mV/div 


78 mV 






82 mV 




50 mV/div 


195 mV 






205 mV 




100 mV/div 


390 mV 






410 mV 




200 mV/div 


780 mV 






820 mV 



11801C Service Manual 



4-9 







Performance Verification 



1 1 801 C Test Record (Cont.) 





Performance Test 


Minimum incoming 


Outgoing 


Maximum 


Vertical Offset Accuracy, Third Compartment 


±2 mV 




Step 10. 


400 mV 


398 mV 




402 mV 


Step 1 1 . 


1 V 


0.998 V 




1 .002 V 




2 V 


1 .998 V 




2.002 V 




-400 mV 


-402 mV 




-398 mV 




-1 V 


-1.002 V 




-0.998 V 




-2 V 


-2.002 V 




-1.998 V 


Sweep Rate Accuracy 


ns Sweep Rate Accuracy 








Step 10. 


2 ns/div (±0.05%) 


18.172 ns 




18.192 ns 


Step 14. 


1 ns/div (±0.08%) 


9.083 ns 




9.098 ns 


ps Sweep Rate Accuracy 








Step 18. 


100 ps/div (±0.8%) 


902 ps 




916 ps 


Step 28. 


10 ps/div (±2.5%) 


248.1 mV 




260.5 mV 


Step 40. 


1 ps/div (±10%) 


23.1 mV 




28.3 mV 



Internal Clock 



Step 6. 
Step 8. 


Rise Time 
Frequency 
Duty Cycle 


97 kHz 
47% 


2.5 ns 
103 kHz 
53% 






Calibrator Output 




Step 6. 


Rise Time 




=250 ps 




Amplitude 


225 mV 


275 mV 











4-10 



Performance Verification 














Performance Verification 



Using These 
Procedures 



Some procedures begin with a setup illustration that shows what test equip- 
ment is needed and how to connect it. The other procedures require only a 
calibrated SD-Series Sampling Head. Refer to Table 4-2 (Test Equipment), 
on the preceding pages for an example of the test equipment for each 
procedure. 

Conventions in this Manuai 

In these procedures, the following conventions are used: 

■ CAPITAL letters within the body of text identify front panel controls, 
indicators, and connectors on the oscilloscope (for example, MEASURE) 
and sampling head. 

■ Bold letters identify menu labels and display messages. 

■ Initial Capital letters identify connectors, controls, and indicators (for 
example. On) on associated test equipment. 

■ In some steps, the first word is italicized to identify a step that contains a 
performance verification and an adjustment instruction. For example, if 
Check is the first word in the title of a step, an electrical specification is 
checked. U Adjust appears in the title, the step involves an electrical 
adjustment. If Examine is the first word in the title, the step concerns 
measurement limits that indicate whether the oscilloscope is operating 
properly; these limits are not to be interpreted as electrical specifica- 
tions. 



Menu Selections and Measurement Techniques 

Details on measurement techniques and instructions for making menu 
selections are generally not included in these procedures. Comprehensive 
descriptions of menus and oscilloscope features are located in the 1 1801C 
Digital Sampling Oscilloscope User Manual. 

User Manual 

The 11 801 C Digital Sampling Oscilloscope User Manual is strongly recom- 
mended to familiarize the first-time user with oscilloscope controls and 
features. 



11 801 C Service Manual 



4-11 





Performance Verification 



4-12 



Performance Verification 





Performance Tests 



This section contains the procedures to check the electrical specifications 
and examine the measurement limits listed in Table 4-1 . To functionally test 
the oscilloscope, simply perform the procedures which have a “yes” indica- 
tion in the Functional column. The Specifications or Measurement Limits are 
given at the beginning of each procedure. Adjustment procedures are 
included in the Adjustment section. Refer to the 1 1801C Digital Oscilloscope 
User Manual for more information about oscilloscope operation. The Setup 
in each procedure provides information concerning test equipment setup or 
interconnection. Refer to Table 4-2 for more information concerning test 
equipment used in the setups. 



11 801 C Service Manual 



4-13 





Performance Tests 



Power-On 

Diagnostics 



This procedure should be performed within the ambient temperature range 
of +18° C to +28° C (+64° F to +82° F), when a performance check at 
peak operating conditions is required. 

Setup to Invoke Power-On Diagnostics 



11801C 

SD-series 
sampling 
head 



o 

o 

o 



(not 

installed 

yet) 




Procedure to Invoke Power-On Diagnostics 




Applying a voltage outside the range printed on the sampling head 
can result in damage. Static electricity is also a hazard. 



The input diodes used in the sampling heads are very susceptible to dam- 
age from overdrive signal or DC voltages and from electrostatic discharge. 
Never apply a voltage outside the range printed on the front of the sampling 
head. Operate the 11 801 C only in a static-controlled environment. 

Connect the wrist strap provided with the 1 1 801 C to the ANTISTATIC CON- 
NECTION, as shown in Figure 2-1 . Refer to the 1 1801C Digital Sampling 
Oscilloscope User Manual tor more information. 

I I Stepi: Check that the sampling head is not yet installed, and that the 
ON/STANDBY switch is in the STANDBY position. 

I I Step 2: Remove the top and bottom covers from the oscilloscope 
(unless you are only performing a functional test). 

I I Step 3: Install an SD Series sampling head in the left sampling head 
compartment marked CH 1/CH 2. 

I I Step 4: With the oscilloscope’s rear panel PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH 
set to OFF, connect the oscilloscope to a suitable power source. 



4-14 



Performance Verification 







Performance Tests 



□ Step 5: Set the rear panel PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH to ON and then 
set the oscilloscope’s front panel ON/STANDBY switch to ON. 

When the oscilloscope is first installed, the rear panel PRINCIPAL POW- 
ER SWITCH should be set to and left in the ON position. From then on, 
use the front panel ON/STANDBY switch to perform all subsequent 
power switching. 

I I Step 6: Monitor the following diagnostic run functions, and note the 
range of possible results. 

Diagnostics 

Each time the front panel ON/STANDBY switch is set to ON, the oscilloscope 
performs Kernel diagnostics on its microprocessor subsystems, followed by 
Self-Test diagnostics on most all of its major circuits. Failures from either of 
these two sets of diagnostics may cause the oscilloscope to enter the Ex- 
tended Diagnostics menu as described later in this section. 

When Kernel diagnostics begin, the Diagnostics in Progress and Comm 
Test in Progress messages are displayed on the screen. If the oscilloscope 
is being powered-on from a cold condition, then the diagnostics may be 
completed before the CRT is warmed up and able to display these mes- 
sages. Diagnostic routines are then performed in parallel on each of the 
oscilloscope’s microprocessor subsystems (Display, Executive, Time Base, 
and Mainframe Acquisition). Following successful execution of their Kernel 
diagnostics. Acquisition microprocessors attempt to communicate with the 
Time Base microprocessor and the Time Base and Display microprocessors 
attempt to communicate with the Executive microprocessor. 

Successful completion of Kernel diagnostics is indicated by the start of 
Self-Test diagnostics. A failure of Kernel diagnostics will be indicated by the 
message, Dsy Kernel Failure, or Comm Test in Progress displaying on the 
screen (for Display kernel failures) and/or by a single high-low beep and 
illuminated menu button indicators (for Executive kernel failures). 

Self-Test Diagnostics 

These begin by displaying Self-Test in Progress (when the Display micropro- 
cessor has successfully communicated with the Executive microprocessor). 
Pattern changes on the display and the flashing of the display indicate a test 
in progress. The Self-Test diagnostics are successfully completed when the 
oscilloscope returns to normal operation. Any failures cause the oscilloscope 
to produce a double high-low beep, and then to display the Extended Diag- 
nostics menu on the screen. Faulty field replaceable units (FRUs) may then 
be identified by touching the (?)Help label. If any errors occur, record the 
error codes for the failed circuit block(s), and then refer the oscilloscope to a 
qualified service person. 



11801C Service Manual 



4-15 





Performance Tests 



Front panel controls are active during the Self-Test diagnostic sequence; 
however, any disturbance of these controls causes a test failure. If such a 
failure occurs, the oscilloscope automatically enters the Extended Diagnos- 
tics mode and displays the Extended Diagnostics menu. Touch the Exit 
label twice to remove this menu. Note that if the diagnostics detect a fatal 
fault, it may not be possible to exit the menu. 

Power-On Diagnostics Compiete 

This state is signified when the oscilloscope returns to normal operation. If 
the oscilloscope passes Power-on diagnostics, the front-panel settings that 
were in effect at the last power-off are restored. 



4-16 



Performance Verification 





Performance Tests 



Sampling Heads 



This procedure shows the setup and lists the steps for calibrating Loop Gain 
and Offset Null. Note that this is an optional enhanced accuracy procedure 
that fine tunes internal channel processing circuitry in conjunction with any 
operational sampling head type being used (the 067-1413-00 calibration 
head is a service device and does not require system calibration). This 
procedure also initiates a built-in 1 1801 C program which causes the main- 
frame to remember which sampling head type was used in the calibration. In 
this way, pre-calibrated heads can be interchanged without requiring recal- 
ibration. 

Setup to Calibrate a Sampling Head 



11801C 



Sampling Head (except SD-1 4) 




L 


J--- (!al I 


e 

o 

o 

0 


|[ 


][ 






t]f° ^r°][|. 


□ 



(not connected yet) n / 12" RF Cable 
50 n Termination 



00 



(not connected yet) 



Procedure to Calibrate a Sampling Head 

I I Step 1 : Power-up and Initialize as follows: 

Set the ON/STANDBY switch to ON rocker / press 

UTILITY button press 

Initialize (in major menu) touch 

Initialize (verify) touch 

I I Step 2: Set up first Automatic Calibration as follows: 

Press the UTILITY button press 

Page to Enhanced Accuracy press 

Gain (in major menu) touch 

Identify Mainframe touch 

Identify Channel (2) touch 

Automatic Calibrate (in pop-up menu) touch 



11801C Service Manual 



4-17 







Performance Tests 



I I Step 3: Perform the Loop Gain calibration as follows: 

Connect the CALIBRATOR output to the sampling head input to be 
calibrated (2). 

Select Proceed (in the Loop Gain pop-up menu) touch 

Store Constants (in pop-up menu) touch 

□ Step 4: Set up second Automatic Calibration as follows: 

Disconnect the calibration cable from the sampling head input. 

Offset (in major menu) touch 

Automatic Calibrate (in pop-up menu) touch 

I I Step 5: Perform the Offset Null calibration as follows: 

Connect a 50 Q termination to the sampling head input. 

Select Proceed (in pop-up menu) touch 

Store Constants (in pop-up menu) touch 

Exit (in pop-up menu) touch 

r~| Step 6: Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for all sampling head compartments 
and channels being tested. 



4-18 



Performance Verification 





Performance Tests 



Extended 

Diagnostics 



The Extended Diagnostics perform more extensive testing than the Self-Test 
diagnostics. They can be used to assist troubleshooting, particularly in 
service environments. 



Setup to Invoke Extended Diagnostics 



11801C 




If the oscilloscope entered the normal operating mode without any diagnos- 
tic failures, perform the following steps to enter the Extended Diagnostics 
mode. No inputs or I/O cables should be attached to the oscilloscope for 
these tests. 

Procedure to Invoke Extended Diagnostics 

□ Step 1: With the sampling head installed as illustrated, check initial 
conditions as follows: 

Set the oscilloscope ON/STANDBY switch to ON press 

Check sampling head Select button is OFF . . visually check indicator 




You may lose stored settings, stored traces, or other data stored in 
NVRAM by turning the power off (that is, setting the ON/STANDBY 
switch to STANDBY or the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH to OFF) 
during the execution of the Extended Diagnostic tests that deal with 
the Executive processor’s NVRAM tests. However, this does not 
seriously affect oscilloscope operation. 



Select the UTILITY button press 

Page to Enhanced Accuracy (in major menu) touch 

Page to Utility2 (in major menu) touch 

Extended Diagnostic (in major menu) touch 

Extended Diagnostic (in pop-up menu) touch 

Select Aii, and then Run to start the tests touch 



11801C Service Manual 



4-19 







Performance Tests 



I I Step 2: C/7ec/f that all tests have executed and have a Pass status. 
Then, make the following selections in the order shown: 

Executive (if not already highlighted) touch 

Block (in major menu) touch 

External I/O (in pop-up menu) touch 

Area (in major menu) touch 

GPIB (in major menu) touch 

Routine (in major menu) touch 

I I Step 3: Select and run the following tests: 

Select Run to start the Intrpt Reset test touch 

Select Reset Status, and then Run to start the test touch 

Select Data Lines, and then Run to start the test touch 

Select Interrupt, and then Run to start the test touch 

I I Step 4: Check that all four of the previous tests have executed and 
passed. Then, exit as follows: 

Select Exit twice to exit Extended Diagnostics touch 



4-20 



Performance Verification 





Performance Tests 



Vertical Reference 
Voltage 



This procedure checks that the vertical reference voltage is at ±5 V at J63C 
on the A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect board (see Figure 4-1). 




This procedure should only be performed if maintenance is required. 
This procedure is not necessary for verifying instrument specifica- 
tions. 



Specifications 

The measured voltage must be within the limits of 5 V ±200 pV and -5 V 
±200 pV. 

Setup to Check Verticai Reference Voitage 



11801C 




Procedure to Check Verticai Reference Voitage 

I I Step 1 : Initialize the oscilloscope settings as follows: 



UTILITY button press 

Initialize (in major menu) touch 

Initialize (in verification pop-up menu) touch 



I I Step 2: Connect the Digital Voltmeter to the ±5 V reference point and 
GND on the A26 Mainframe (M/F) Acquisition Interconnect board. See 
Figure 4-1. 

□ Step 3: Set the Voltmeter for DC Voltage, and check for a reading of 
±5 V ±200 pV. 

I I Step 4: Connect the Digital Voltmeter to the -5 V reference point and 
GND on the A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect board. 



11801C Service Manual 



4-21 






Performance Tests 



I I Step 5: Set the Voltmeter for DC Voltage, and check for a reading of 
-5 V ±200 |jV 




If the readings noted in Steps 3 and 5 are outside the stated limits, 
then servicing of the oscilloscope is required before continuing to 
the Horizontal Reference Clock procedure. 




Figure 4-1 : A26 M/F Acquisition interconnect Board Test Point Locations 



4-22 



Performance Verification 




Performance Tests 



Horizontal 
Reference Clock 



This procedure verifies the correct operation and accuracy of the oscillo- 
scope’s horizontal reference clock (see Figure 4-2). 




This procedure should only be performed if maintenance is required. 
This procedure is not necessary for verifying instrument specifica- 
tions. 



Specifications 

The operational frequency specification for the horizontal reference clock is 
200,000 kHz, ±5 kHz. 

Setup to Check Horizontai Reference Ciock 



11801C 




Procedure to Check Horizontai Reference Ciock 

I I Step 1 : Initialize the oscilloscope settings as follows: 



UTILITY button press 

Initialize (in major menu) touch 

Initialize (in verification pop-up menu) touch 



I I Step 2: Perform the following 1 1 801 C operations in the order listed: 

■ Set the front panel ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY. 

■ Set the oscilloscope on its right side (as viewed from facing the front 
of the oscilloscope). 

■ Set the oscilloscope front panel ON/STANDBY switch to ON. 



11801C Service Manual 



4-23 






Performance Tests 



r~l Step 3: Set the Frequency Counter controls/output as follows: 



Frequency counter 

Mode 

Trigger 

Slope 

Attenuation . . . 
Termination . . 



Frequency A 

AC 

. + (positive) 

1X 

1 MQ 



I I Step 4: At U191 on the A5 Time Base/Controller board, touch the 10X 
Probe to pin 9 and the ground probe to pin 1 . 

I I Step 5: Check that the frequency counter reads within the limits of 
199,995 kHz and 200,005 kHz. 




Figure 4-2: A5 Time Base/Controiier Board Test Point Locations 



4-24 



Performance Verification 







Performance Tests 



Vertical Accuracy 



This procedure shows the setups and lists the steps to check the vertical 
accuracy of the oscilloscope. 

Setup to Check Vertical Gain 




Procedure to Check Vertical Gain 

r~| Step1: Install a Calibration Head (067-1413-00) into the position 
shown in the setup diagram (CH 1/CH 2 slot). If the unit is in Standby 
mode, set the power switch to ON. Set the Precision Voltage Source to 
0 V and connect it to Channel 2 of the Calibration Head. 

NOTE 

If powering up from a cold start, the diagnostics will report an error 
using the Calibration Head. The report will indicate a Time Base 
error. To clear this, exit the diagnostics. Then, ignore the subse- 
quent time base calibration failure notice and continue with the 
following steps. 



I I Step 2: Initialize the mainframe as follows: 

UTILITY button press 

Initialize (in major menu) touch 

Initialize (in verification pop-up menu) touch 

r~l Step 3: Trigger the oscilloscope as follows: 

TRIGGER button press 

Source (in major menu) touch 

Internal Clock (in pop-up menu) touch 



11801C Service Manual 



4-25 






Performance Tests 



I I Step 4: Identify the trace as follows: 

Def Tra icon touch 

Identify Channel (2) touch 

Select Enter Desc touch 

I I steps: Set the mainframe Vert Offset as follows: 

Vert size icon touch 

Set Vert Size:M2 to 2 mV/div adjust upper knob 

r~| Step 6: Set Averaging as follows: 

Acquire Desc (in major menu) touch 

Average N (in pop-up menu) touch 

I I Step 7: Select the Mean Measurement as follows: 

MEASURE button press 

Measurements (in major menu) touch 

Mean (in the Measurements pop-up menu) touch 

Compare & References (in major menu) touch 

Save Current Meas Values as References 

(in pop-up menu) touch 

Compare off (to on in pop-up menu) touch 

r~l Step 8: Set the Voltage source to 8 mV 

Select Remove/Clr Trace (in major menu) touch 

Select Clear Trace (in pop-up menu) touch 



I I Step 9: Wait for averaging to complete. Then, check that the AMean 
value is to be within 7.8 mV (lower spec) and 8.2 mV (upper spec). 

NOTE 

Averaging will complete faster if you exit the measurement menu 
and then return when averaging is complete. Alternatively, use the 
dial to move the Main Size setting two notches higher than the 
default setting. 

I I Step 10: Change the polarity of the voltage differential coming from the 
precision voltage Source. Check that the AMean value is between 
-7.8 mV and -8.2 mV. 



4-26 



Performance Verification 





Performance Tests 



I I Step 11: Refer to Table 4-3 and check actual results against the table 
specifications for the setting levels indicated. 

NOTE 

Specifications are one percent of fuii scaie at each voits/ctiv setting. 
Example: at 5 mV/div full scale for 10 div is 50 mV, which gives an 
upper and lower spec tolerance of +0.5 mV and -0.5 mV. 



Table 4-3: Voltage Source Settings 



Sens. 


Source V 


Lower Spec 


Upper Spec 


5 mV/div 


-20 mV 


-20.5 mV 


-19.5 mV 


10 mV/div 


-40 mV 


-41.0 mV 


-39.0 mV 


20 mV/div 


-80 mV 


-82 mV 


-78 mV 


50 mV/div 


-200 mV 


-205 mV 


-195 mV 


100 mV/div 


-400 mV 


-410 mV 


-390 mV 


200 mV/div 


-800 mV 


-820 mV 


-780 mV 


5 mV/div 


20 mV 


19.5 mV 


20.5 mV 


10 mV/div 


40 mV 


39.0 mV 


41.0 mV 


20 mV/div 


80 mV 


78 mV 


82 mV 


50 mV/div 


200 mV 


195 mV 


205 mV 


100 mV/div 


400 mV 


390 mV 


410 mV 


200 mV/div 


800 mV 


780 mV 


820 mV 



NOTE 

Up to now, you have been working with trace 1 (Channel 2), and 
internal mainframe acquisition measurement channel 1. Use the 
following steps to verify the vertical accuracy through internal 
acquisition measurement channel 2, using trace 2. (Don’t remove 
Voltage Source from Calibration Head Channel 2.) 



I I Step 12: Initialize the mainframe as follows: 

UTILITY button press 

Initialize (in major menu) touch 

Initialize (in verification pop-up menu) touch 

r~| Step 13: Trigger the oscilloscope as follows: 

TRIGGER button press 

Source (in major menu) touch 

Internal Clock (in pop-up menu) touch 



11801C Service Manual 



4-27 








Performance Tests 



I I Step 14; Define the first trace as follows: 



Def Tra icon touch 

Identify Channel (1) touch 

Select Enter Desc touch 



Note that Trace 1 has been selected at the base of the screen (just 
above Ml Main). 

I I Step 15: Define the second trace as follows: 



Def Tra icon touch 

Identify Channel (2) touch 

Select Enter Desc touch 



Note that Trace 2 has now been selected at the base of the screen 
(just above M2 Main). 

r~l Step 16: Repeat Steps 5 through 12. 

r~l Step 17: Power down the oscilloscope. Repeat Steps 1 through 16 for 
sampling head compartment 3. 

Setup to Check Offset Accuracy 




Procedure to Check Offset Accuracy 

r~| Stepi: This second vertical accuracy test uses the same setup prelimi- 
naries as the previous test. The Calibration Head/Time Base error will 
only reappear if you have activated power-up diagnostics. If so, exit 
diagnostics and, in either case, continue from here. 

□ Step 2: Initialize the mainframe as follows: 



UTILITY button press 

Initialize (in major menu) touch 

Initialize (in verification pop-up menu) touch 



4-28 



Performance Verification 






Performance Tests 



r~l Step 3: Trigger the oscilloscope as follows: 

TRIGGER button press 

Source (in major menu) touch 

Internal Clock (in pop-up menu) touch 

I I Step 4: Define the trace as follows: 

Def Tra icon touch 

Identify Channel (2) touch 

Select Enter Desc touch 

r~| Step 5: Set Averaging as follows: 

Acquire Desc (in major menu) touch 

Average N (in pop-up menu) touch 

Select Exit touch 

I I Step 6: Select the Mean Measurement as follows: 

MEASURE Button press 

Measurements (in major menu) touch 

Mean (in pop-up menu) touch 

Compare & Reference (in major menu) touch 

Save Current Meas Values as References 

(in pop-up menu) touch 

Compare off (changes to on / in pop-up menu) touch 

Select Exit touch 

I I Step 7: Set the Vertical Size and Offset as follows: 

Vertical size icon touch 

Adjust the Vert Size: M2 to 10 mV/div adjust upper knob 

Vert Offset: M2 (in major menu) touch 

Key in 400 mV (400m) on the pop-up display touch 

Select Enter touch 

Check that 400 mV has now entered into the display below Vert Offset: 
M2. 

I I Step 8: Connect the Voltage Source to the DIRECT input of the Calibra- 
tion Head. 

r~l Step 9: Adjust the Voltage Source to 400 mV. 

I I Step 10: Wait for averaging to complete. Then, check that AMean value 
is between -2 mV and -1-2 mV. 

I I Step 1 1 : Repeat Steps 2 through 1 0 for the offset values shown in 
Table 4-4. 

I I Step 12: Power down the oscilloscope. Repeat Steps 1 through 1 1 for 
sampling head compartment 3. 



11801C Service Manual 



4-29 





Performance Tests 



Table 4-4: Vertical Offset Test Values 



Sens. 


Source V/ 
Vert Offset 


Lower Spec 


Upper Spec 


10 mV/div 


1 V 


0.998 V 


1 .002 V 


10 mV/div 


2 V 


1 .998 V 


2.002 V 


10 mV/div 


-400 mV 


-402 mV 


-398 mV 


10 mV/div 


-1 V 


-1.002 V 


-0.998 V 


10 mV/div 


-2 V 


-2.002 V 


-1.998 V 



4-30 



Performance Verification 




Performance Tests 



System Vertical 
RMS Noise 



This procedure uses the RMS measurement function to measure the noise 
on the trace from a sampling head compartment. 

Setup to Examine Vertical RMS Noise 



Calibration Head 

11801C I 




Procedure to Examine Vertical RMS Noise 

I I Step 1: Install the Calibration Head (067-1413-00) into the position 
shown in the setup diagram. If the unit was in standby mode, set the 
ON/STANDBY switch to ON. 

NOTE 

If powering up from a cold start, The diagnostics will report an error 
using the Calibration Head. The report will indicate a Time Base 
error. To clear this, exit the diagnostics. Then, ignore the subse- 
quent time base calibration failure notice and continue with the 
following steps. 



I I Step 2: Initialize the mainframe as follows: 

UTILITY button press 

Initialize (in major menu) touch 

Initialize (in verification pop-up menu) touch 

r~| Step 3: Trigger the oscilloscope as follows: 

TRIGGER button press 

Source (in major menu) touch 

Internal Clock (in pop-up menu) touch 

I I Step 4: Identify the trace as follows: 

Def Tra icon touch 

Identify Channel (1) touch 

Select Enter Desc touch 



11801C Service Manual 



4-31 






Performance Tests 



I I steps: Set the mainframe Vert Size as follows: 

Vert Size icon touch 

Set Vert Size:M1 to 2 mV/div adjust upper knob 

r~| Step 6: Set the record length as follows: 

Horizontal Desc (in major menu) touch 

Main Record Length (in pop-up menu) touch 

Set Main Record Len to 5120 points adjust upper knob 

r~| Step 7: Store the trace as follows: 

STORE/RECALL button press 

Store Trace (in major menu) touch 

Trace 1 (in pop-up menu) touch 

Note that you must touch Trace 1 even though it is highlighted in 
the menu. 

Recail Trace (in major menu) touch 

STO 1 (in pop-up menu) touch 

I I Step 8: Measure the Mean value as follows: 

MEASURE button press 

Measurements (in major menu) touch 

Mean (in pop-up menu) touch 

Exit Menu (in pop-up menu) touch 

NOTE 

Record (write down) the mean value for use in the next step. 

□ Step 9: Define the trace to be stored as follows: 

Def Tra icon touch 

Stored Traces (in pop-up menu) touch 

Stored 1 (in pop-up menu) touch 

Enter ST01 - (mean value) touch 

Use pop-up key pad to enter ST01 - (mean value) recorded 
(written down) in Step 8. 



4-32 



Performance Verification 





Performance Tests 



NOTE 

For example, if mean value is 50.2 pV, you would key in 
“-(50.2 EEX - 6)”. ST01 already appears on upper left of display. 
Exponents are entered by pressing the EEX key, followed by the 
sign of the exponent (if negative), followed by the exponent value. 



Enter Desc (in pop-up menu) touch 

I I Step 10: Measure the RMS value as follows: 



MEASURE button press 

Measurements (in major menu) touch 

RMS (in pop-up menu) touch 

Check that RMS is <200 pV. 

Exit Menu (to exit) touch 

I I Step 1 1 : Erase the test traces as follows: 

STORE/RECALL button press 

Delete Trace (in major menu) touch 

All Traces (in pop-up menu) touch 



Delete Selected Traces (in pop-up menu) touch 

I I Step 12: Repeat Steps 4 through 1 1 at the sensitivities listed in 

Table 4-5, and check the resulting RMS against the matching specifica- 
tion value in the table. 



Table 4-5: Sensitivity Settings 



Sensitivity 


Specification 


5 mV/div 


500 pV 


10 mV/div 


1 mV 


20 mV/div 


632 pV 


50 mV/div 


1 .58 mV 


100 mV/div 


3.16 mV 


200 mV/div 


6.32 mV 



r~l Step 13: Power down the oscilloscope. Repeat Steps 1 through 12 for 
all sampling head compartments. 



11801C Service Manual 



4-33 








Performance Tests 



Sweep Rate Accuracy 



This procedure shows the setups and lists the steps to check the Sweep 
Rate Accuracy. 



Setup to Examine Sweep Rate Accuracy 



CH 1 SD-24 




Procedure to Examine Sweep Rate Accuracy 

□ Step 1 : Install the SD-24 Sampling Head into the compartment shown 
in the setup diagram (CH 1/CH 2 slot). If the unit is in standby mode, set 



the ON/STANDBY switch to ON. 

I I Step 2: Initialize the mainframe as follows: 

UTILITY button press 

Initialize (in major menu) touch 

Initialize (in verification pop-up menu) touch 

I I Step 3: Set the horizontal record length as follows: 

Horizontal Desc (in major menu) touch 

Main Record Length (in pop-up menu) touch 

Set Main Record Len to 1024 points adjust upper knob 

I I Step 4: Identify the trace as follows: 

Def Tra icon touch 

Identify Mainframe touch 

Identify Channel (1) touch 

Select Enter Desc touch 



4-34 



Performance Verification 







Performance Tests 



r~l Step 5: Engage high precision calibration mode as follows: 

UTILITY button press 

Page to Enhanced Accuracy touch 

Time Base Cal Mode (in major menu) touch 

High Prec (in pop-up menu) touch 

Exit (in pop-up menu) touch 

Sweep Rate Accuracy 2 ns/div 

r~| Step 6: Adjust the Sweep Rate to 2 ns/div. 

Horizontal icon touch 

Set Main Size to 2 ns/div adjust upper knob 

I I Step 7: Adjust the Signal Generator to the following settings: 

Frequency 55 MHz 

Amplitude I.OVrms 

NOTE 

Check that selected Sampling Head channel (1) indicator is flash- 
ing. If not, select channel (1) by pressing select button. 

I I Step 8: Turn mainframe averaging on. 

WAVEFORM button press 

Acquire Desc (in major menu) touch 

Average N On (in pop-up menu) touch 

Select Exit (in the pop-up menu) touch 

NOTE 

Position the display so the sine wave is centered on the screen. To 
ensure accurate period measurement, the display must be a full 
cycle. 

r~| Step 9: Obtain Period as follows: 

MEASURE button press 

Measurement (in major menu) touch 

Period (in pop-up menu) touch 

Exit Menu (in pop-up menu) touch 

r~| Step 10: Examine that the period is between 18.172 ns and 18.192 ns, 

showing that sweep rate accuracy is within 0.05%. 



11801C Service Manual 



4-35 





Performance Tests 



Sweep Rate Accuracy 1 ns/div 

r~| Step 11: Adjust the Sweep Rate to 1 ns/div. 

Horizontal ( ^ ) icon touch 

Set Main Size to 1 ns/div adjust upper knob 

I I Step 12: >4c//(7sf the Signal Generator to the following settings: 

Frequency 110 MHz 

Amplitude I.OVrms 

□ Step 13: Press the UTILITY button and adjust the lower knob for a 
display showing a full waveform. 

I I Step 14: Press the MEASURE button and check for a period interval 
between 9.083 ns and 9.098 ns, showing that sweep rate accuracy is 
within 0.08%. 

Sweep Rate Accuracy 100 ps/div 

r~l Step 15: Use the upper control knob to adjust the Main Size to 100 ps/ 
div. 

I I Step 16: Ac//t/sf the Signal Generator to the following settings: 



Frequency 1.1 GHz 

Amplitude 2.0 Vp.p (1 .4 Vrms) 



(Set for 1 .000 V ±0.004 Vp.p on screen.) 

□ Step 17: Press the UTILITY button and adjust the lower knob for a 
display showing a full waveform. 

□ Step 18: Press the MEASURE button and check for a period interval 
between 902 ps and 916 ps, showing that sweep rate accuracy is with- 
in 0.8%. 

Sweep Rate Accuracy 10 ps/div 

I I Step 19: Ac//usf the Signal Generator to the following settings: 



Frequency 800 MHz 

Amplitude 2.0 Vp.p (1 .4 Vrms) 

(Set for 1 .000 V ±0.004 Vp.p on screen.) 

I I Step 20: Invoke smoothing as follows: 

WAVEFORM button press 

Sampling Head Fnc’s (in major menu) touch 

Smoothing On (in pop-up menu) touch 

Exit (in pop-up menu) touch 



r~| Step 21: Ac//usf the Main Size to 130 ps/div. 



4-36 



Performance Verification 





Performance Tests 



r~| Step 22: Adjust the Main Pos to 55 ns. 

r~| Step 23: Set the Main Pos control (lower knob) so that the zero cross- 
ing of the waveform occurs on the center graticule. 

I I Step 24: Set the horizontal reference point to Center as follows, so that 
the waveform will be expanded about the horizontal center: 



WAVEFORM button press 

Horizontal Desc (in major menu) touch 

Center (in pop-up menu) touch 

I I Step 25: Adjust the Vertical Size as follows: 

Vertical icon touch 

Set Vert Size to 50 mV adjust upper knob 

I I Step 26: Adjust the Main Size as follows: 

Horizontal icon touch 

Set the Main Size to 10 ps/div adjust upper knob 

I I Step 27: Activate the cursors as follows: 

Cursors icon touch 



I I Step 28: Read the Av located in the major menu. Av should be within 
-260.5 mV and -248.1 mV or -1-248.1 mV and -1-260.5 mV, showing 
that the sweep rate accuracy is within 2.5%. 

I I Step 29: Touch Exit (in the major menu). 

Sweep Rate Accuracy 1 ps/div 

I I Step 30: Ac//usf the Signal Generator to the following settings: 



Frequency 800 MHz 

Amplitude 2.0 Vp.p (1 .4 Vrms) 

(Set for 1 .000 V ±0.004 Vp.p on screen.) 

□ Step 31 : Invoke smoothing as follows: 

WAVEFORM button press 

Sampling Head Fnc’s (in major menu) touch 

Smoothing On (in pop-up menu) touch 

Exit (in pop-up menu) touch 



r~| Step 32: Adjust the Main Size to 130 ps/div. 
r~| Step 33: Adjust the Main Pos to 55 ns. 

I I Step 34: Set the Main Pos control (lower knob) so that the zero cross- 
ing of the waveform occurs on the center graticule. 



11801C Service Manual 



4-37 





Performance Tests 



I I Step 35: Set the horizontal reference point to Center as follows, so that 
the waveform will be expanded around the horizontal center: 

WAVEFORM button press 

Horizontal Desc (in major menu) touch 

Center (in pop-up menu) touch 

I I Step 36: Adjust the Vertical Size as follows: 

Vertical icon touch 

Set Vert Size to 5 mV adjust upper knob 

I I Step 37: Set the Main Size as follows: 

Horizontal icon touch 

Set Main Size to 1 ps/div adjust upper knob 

□ Step 38: Turn mainframe averaging on. 

WAVEFORM button press 

Acquire Desc (in major menu) touch 

Average N (in pop-up menu) touch 

Select Exit (in pop-up menu) touch 

I I Step 39: Activate the cursors as follows: 

Cursors icon touch 

I I Step 40: Read the Av located in the major menu. Av should be within 
-28.3 mV and -23.1 mV, or within -I-32.1 mV and -1-28.3 mV, showing 
that the sweep rate accuracy is within 20%. 

I I Step 41: Touch Exit (in the major menu). 



4-38 



Performance Verification 





Performance Tests 



Triggering, 
Externai Direct 



This procedure verifies the correct operation and accuracy of the oscillo- 
scope’s trigger system. 

Specifications 

The specifications for triggering using the external trigger are as follows: 

■ 1 00 mVp.p at 300 MHz 

■ 100 mVp.pat 1000 MHz 

■ 1 00 mVp.p at 3.0 GHz 

Setup to Check Triggering 



SD-24 

Sampling 

Head Qj-j 7 2X Attenuators 




Procedure to Check Triggering 

I I Step 1 : Install the SD-24 Sampling Head into the position shown in the 
setup diagram (CH 1/CH 2 slot). If the unit was in standby mode, set the 
ON/STANDBY switch to ON. 

I I Step 2: Initialize the mainframe as follows: 



UTILITY button press 

Initialize (in major menu) touch 

Initialize (in verification pop-up menu) touch 



r~l Step 3: Adjust the high frequency generator as follows: 

400 mVp.p at 300 MHz 

I I Step 4: On the Sampling Head, press the Channel 1 select button. 



II8OIC Service Manual 



4-39 






Performance Tests 



I I Step 5: Make the following selections: 

AUTOSET button press 

Slightly adjust the Trigger Levei (in TRIGGER major menu) if 
necessary. 

MEASURE button press 

Measurement (in major menu) touch 

Peak-Peak (in pop-up menu) touch 

WAVEFORM button press 

Sampling Head Fnc’s 

(in major menu) touch 

Smoothing On (in pop-up menu) touch 

Exit (in pop-up menu) touch 

□ Step 6: Check waveform for stable triggering. Using AUTOSET, repeat 
procedure for the following frequency generator settings: 

400mVp.p at 1000 MHz 
400 mVp.p at 3.0 GHz 



4-40 



Performance Verification 





Performance Tests 



Pr©SCal6r Triggsring procedure verifies the correct operation and accuracy of the 1 1801C’s 

Prescaler trigger system. 

Specifications 

The specifications for Prescaler triggering are as follows: 

■ 800 mVp.p at 2 GHz 

■ 600 mVp.p at 3 GHz 

■ 600 mVp.p at 1 0 GHz 

Setup to Check Prescaier Triggering 




Procedure to Check Prescaier Triggering 

I I Step 1 : Install the SD-24 Sampling Head into the CH 1/CH 2 slot of the 
mainframe. Set the ON/STANDBY switch to ON and let the instrument 
warm up for approximately 15 minutes. Initialize the mainframe settings, 
then perform the following settings and steps. 

□ Step 2: Connect the High Frequency Generator to the Picosecond 
Pulse Labs (PSPL) 10X Pick-off IN. Connect the PSPL-^ 10 output to 
Channel 1 of the Sampling Head. 



11801C Service Manual 



4-41 






Performance Tests 



I I Step 3: Connect the PSPL X1 output to the power meter/sensor (meter/ 
sensor must be calibrated). Set the Generator frequency to 2 GHz. 

Adjust the Generator output until the power meter reads: 

2.0 dBm (800 mVp.p). Use correction factors for the sensor. 

I I Step 4: Connect the PSPL XI output to the 1 1801 C Prescaler Trigger 
input. 

I I Step 5: 1 1 801 C mainframe settings: 



DefTra touch 

Select Channel 1 , Ml touch 

TRIGGER button press 

Source touch 

External Prescaler touch 

Exit touch 

Horizontal ( ^ ) icon touch 

Adjust Main Size to 200 ps/div adjust upper knob 

Vertical ( | ) icon touch 

Adjust Main Size to 10 mV/div adjust upper knob 



I I Step 6: Turn AVG ON. C/?ecA' display for stable triggering. Then turn the 

AVG OFF. 

r~l Step 7: Repeat steps 3, 4, 5 and 6 for the following settings: 



Table 4-6: Prescaler Test Settings 



Generator Freq 


Power Reading 


Main Size 


Vert Size 


3 GHz 


-0.458 dBm 

(600 mVp.p) 


50 ps/div 


10 mV/d iv 


10 GHz 


-0.458 dBm 

(600 mVp.p) 


50 ps/div 


10 mV/d iv 



4-42 



Performance Verification 




Performance Tests 



Internal Clock 



This procedure verifies the correct operation and accuracy of the oscillo- 
scope’s Internal Clock signal. 

Measurement Limits 

The measurement limits of the internal clock pulse are as follows: 

■ rise time <2.5 ns 

■ frequency of 100 kHz ±3% accuracy 

■ duty cycle 50% ±3% 

Setup to Examine Internai Ciock 

CH 1 




Procedure to Examine internai Ciock 

I I Step 1 : Install the SD-24 Sampling Head into the position shown in the 
setup diagram (CH 1/CH 2 slot). If the unit was in standby mode, set the 



ON/STANDBY switch to ON. 

I I Step 2: Initialize the mainframe as follows: 

UTILITY button press 

Initialize (in major menu) touch 

Initialize (in verification pop-up menu) touch 

r~l Step 3: Trigger the oscilloscope as follows: 

TRIGGER Button press 

Source (in pop-up menu) Internal Clock 



I I Step 4: On the Sampling Head, press the Channel 1 select button. 
□ Step 5: On the oscilloscope, press the AUTOSET button. 



11801C Service Manual 



4-43 






Performance Tests 



I I Step 6: Check the rise time as follows: 

MEASURE button press 

Measurements (in the major menu) touch 

Rise (in the pop-up menu) touch 

Check that Rise is <2.5 ns. 

Exit Menu (in pop-up menu) touch 

r~l Step 7: Change the sweep rate as follows: 

Horizontal ( ^ ) icon touch 

Adjust Main Size to 5 ps/div adjust upper knob 

r~| steps: Check the frequency as follows: 

MEASURE button press 

Measurements (in major menu) touch 

Frequency (in pop-up menu) touch 

Duty Cycle (in pop-up menu) touch 

Check XhaX the frequency is between 97 kHz and 103 kHz. 

Check that the Duty Cycle is between 47% and 53%. 

Exit Menu (in pop-up menu) touch 



4-44 



Performance Verification 





Performance Tests 



Calibrator Output 



This procedure verifies the correct operation and accuracy of the oscillo- 
scope’s calibrator. 

Measurement Limits 

The measurement limits of the calibrator output are as follows: 

■ amplitude 250 mV ±15% 

■ rise time =250 ps 

Setup to Examine Caiibrator Output 

CH 1 




Procedure to Examine Caiibrator 

I I Step 1 : Install the SD-24 Sampling Head into the position shown in the 
setup diagram (CH 1/CH 2 slot). If the unit was in standby mode, set the 



ON/STANDBY switch to ON. 

I I Step 2: Initialize the mainframe as follows: 

UTILITY button press 

Initialize (in major menu) touch 

Initialize (in verification pop-up menu) touch 

r~l Step 3: Trigger the oscilloscope as follows: 

TRIGGER Button press 

Source (in pop-up menu) Internal Clock 



□ Step 4: On the Sampling Head, press the Channel 1 select button. 
r~| Step 5: On the oscilloscope, press the AUTOSET button. 



11801C Service Manual 



4-45 






Performance Tests 



r~l Step 6: Check the peak-to-peak amplitude as follows: 

MEASURE button press 

Measurements (in the major menu) touch 

Peak-Peak (in the pop-up menu) touch 

Rise (in the pop-up menu) touch 

Rise (in the major menu) touch 

Proximai (in the pop-up menu) touch 

Check XhaX peak-to-peak amplitude is between 212.5 mV and 
287.5 mV (250 mV ±15%). 

Adjust Proximai for 20% and Distal for 80%. 

Check that rise time is approximately 250 ps. 



4-46 



Performance Verification 





Adjustments 



This section contains procedures to check electrical specifications, to ex- 
amine measurement limits, and to manually set all internal adjustments 
listed in Table 5-1 . Use these procedures to return the oscilloscope to speci- 
fied operation following repair or as part of a comprehensive performance 
verification procedure to verify that the oscilloscope meets specifications. To 
adjust the oscilloscope, simply perform the procedures listed in this section. 
The Specifications or Measurement Limits are given at the beginning of each 
procedure. Functional tests are included in the Performance Verification 
section. Refer to the 1 1801C Digitai Sampiing Osciiloscope User Manuai for 
more information about specifications and oscilloscope operation. The 
Setup in each procedure provides information concerning test equipment 
setup or interconnection. Refer to Table 5-2 for more information concerning 
test equipment used in the setups. 

Most Adjustment and Performance Verification procedures can be run in any 
order. However, the Sampling Head Calibration must always precede other 
procedures which use an operational sampling head. Also, if a different 
sampling head is used, then sampling head calibration is required for each 
additional sampling head. 



11801C Service Manual 



5-1 





Adjustments 



Table 5-1 : 


Measurement Limits and Adjustments 




Procedure Description 


Measurement 
Limits (Examine) 


Adjustments 

(Adjust) 


Power Supply 






Voltage Supply 


+ 4.85 V to +5.25 V 


none 


Voltage Reference 


+ 5.15 V to +5.25 V 


R800 +5.2 V Ref for +5.20 V 


Regulator Reference 


+9.95 V to +10.05 V 


R730 + 1 0 V Ref for + 1 0.00 V 


Display 






Cutoff 


visible 


SCREEN, on transformer on 
A8 CRT Driver board, until 
display appears 


Convergence 


primary colors are not 
separated in the white grid 


CONVERGENCE, R210, for 
optimum convergence of 
red, green, and blue 


Focus 


focused grid pattern 


FOCUS, on transformer on 
A8 CRT Driver board, for 
optimum focus on white grid 
pattern 


Vertical Size and 
Position 


align with tic marks 


VERT SIZE, L321 , and VERT 
POS, R31 1 , for optimum 
alignment 


Horizontal Size, 
Linearity and 
Position 


align with tic marks and for 

optimum 

appearance 


H-SIZE, R501, H-LIN, R502, 
and H-POS, R500, for 
optimum alignment and 
linearity 


Gray Scale 


white at the top of the 
display and gray at the 
bottom, and the right side of 
the display is cut off 


SCREEN, on transformer on 
A8 CRT Driver board; RED, 
R200; GREEN, R201,;and 
BLUE, R203; for cutoff and 
color balance 


Color Impurity 


no severe color impurities in 
red, green, and blue display 


cycle power on and off 


Real Time Clock 


1 ,000,000 ps ±5 ps 


Real Time Clock for 
1 ,000,000 ps 





5-2 



Adjustment Procedures 

















Adjustments 



Test Equipment 



Table 5-2 (Test Equipment), contains suggested test equipment for use in 
this manual. Procedure steps are based on the test equipment examples 
given, but you may substitute other equipment with similar specifications. 
The use of different equipment may alter test results, setup information, and 
related connectors and adapters. 

Table 5-2: Test Equipment 



Description 


Minimum 

Specification 


Examples of Applicable 
Test Equipment 


High Frequency 
Sine Wave Genera- 
tor 


10 MHz to 10 GHz 


WILTRON 6759B Opt 2 


Sampling Head 


SD-Series 


SD-24 and any other Tektronix 
SD-Series Sampling Head 
except SD-14 


Digital Voltmeter 
(w/test leads) 


<0.005% Accuracy 


FLUKE 8842A Digital Voltmeter 


Calibration Genera- 
tor 


DC output, 0.25% 
accuracy 1 V output 
amplitude 


Tektronix PG 506 Calibration 
Generator with a TM 
500-Series Power Module 


Frequency Counter 


One Part in 
1 ,000,000 Accuracy 


Tektronix DC 5010 Universal 
Counter/Timer with a 
TM 5000-Series Power Module 


Calibration Head 




Tektronix Calibration Head 
067-1413-00 


Precision Voltage 
Source 




DATA PRECISION 8200 


Test Terminal 


any GPIB 
(IEEE- 1978) con- 
troller, or ASCII ter- 
minal equipped with 
an RS-232-C port. 
Requires compat- 
ible RS-232-C serial 
interface cable 


IBM compatible PC with termi- 
nal emulation software 


Coaxial Cable, 50 Q 
(3 required) 


50 Q, 36-inch, male 
BNC connectors 


Tektronix Part 012-0482-00 


Coaxial Cable, RF 


RF cable, 12 in., 
SMA connectors 


Tektronix Part 174-1364-00 




RF cable, 8.5 in., 
SMA connectors 


Tektronix Part 174-1120-00 



11801C Service Manual 



5-3 




Adjustments 



Table 5-2: Test Equipment (Cent.) 



Description 


Minimum 

Specification 


Examples of Applicable 
Test Equipment 


Adapters 


BNC female-to-male 
Dual Banana 


Tektronix Part 103-0090-00 




BNC male-to-female 
Dual Banana 


Tektronix Part 103-0035-00 




SMA male-to-BNC 
female (8 required) 


Tektronix Part 015-1018-00 




SMA female-to-BNC 
male 


Tektronix Part 013-0126-00 




SMA male-to-N 
male 


Tektronix Part 015-0369-00 


Power Divider, 50 Q 


6 dB load isolation, 
50 Q, SMA connec- 
tors 


Tektronix Part 015-1014-00 


Termination, 50 Q 


Impedance, 50 Q; 
accuracy within 2%; 
SMA connectors 


Tektronix Part 015-1022-00 


Attenuator, 10X 


20 dB attenuation, 
50 Q, one male and 
one female 


Tektronix Part 01 1 -0059-02 


Attenuator, 2X 


50 Q, SMA, one 
male and one 
female 


Tektronix Part 015-1001 -00 


Power Supplies 
Troubleshooting 
Fixture 




Tektronix Part 067-1264-00 
Extended Diagnostics 
1 1000-Series Power Supplies 
troubleshooting fixture 


Probe, 10X 


Attenuation 1 0X 


Tektronix P6106A 


Alignment Tool 


Plastic hex 


Tektronix Part 003-0301 -00 




Insulated slot 


Tektronix Part 003-0675-01 




Square Tip 
(ceramic) 


Tektronix Part 003-1400-00 


Magnetic Screw- 
driver 


Holder for Torx 
head tips 


Tektronix Part 003-0293-00 


Torx Head Screw- 
driver 


#10 tip 


Tektronix Part 003-0814-00 




#15 tip 


Tektronix Part 003-0966-00 




#20 tip 


Tektronix Part 003-0866-00 



5-4 



Adjustment Procedures 




Adjustments 



Table 5-2: Test Equipment (Cent.) 



Description 


Minimum 

Specification 


Examples of Applicable 
Test Equipment 


External Loopback 
Connector 


RS-232-C connec- 
tor 


Tektronix Part 013-0198-00 


Shorting Strap 


two alligator clips 
on a short pigtail 
conductor 




Integrated Circuit 
Extracting Tool 


IC Insertion-Extrac- 
tion Pliers, 28-pin 
type 


General Tool P/N U505BG or 
equivalent 


Board Removal 
Tools 


Straight-slot screw- 
driver, large 






Torx-drive screw- 
driver, 

T-7, T-8, T-10, T-15, 
T-20, T-25 






Allen (hex) Wrench, 
1/16-inch 






Nutdrivers, 
3/16-inch, 1/4-inch, 
7/16-inch 






Needle-nose pliers 




Small Ruler 


half inch rulings 




Antistatic wrist strap 




Tektronix Part 006-3415-04 



11801C Service Manual 



5-5 












Adjustments 



Using These 
Procedures 



Some procedures begin with a setup illustration that shows what test equip- 
ment is needed and how to connect it. The other procedures require only a 
calibrated SD-Series Sampling Head. Refer to Table 5-2 (Test Equipment), 
on the preceding pages for an example of the test equipment for each 
procedure. 

Conventions in this Manuai 

In these procedures, the following conventions are used: 

■ CAPITAL letters within the body of text identify front panel controls, 
indicators, and connectors on the oscilloscope (for example, MEASURE) 
and sampling head. 

■ Bold letters identify menu labels and display messages. 

■ Initial Capital letters identify connectors, controls, and indicators (for 
example. On) on associated test equipment. 

■ In some steps, the first word is italicized to identify a step that contains a 
performance verification and an adjustment instruction. For example, if 
Check is the first word in the title of a step, an electrical specification is 
checked. U Adjust appears in the title, the step involves an electrical 
adjustment. If Examine is the first word in the title, the step concerns 
measurement limits that indicate whether the oscilloscope is operating 
properly; these limits are not to be interpreted as electrical specifica- 
tions. 



Menu Selections and Measurement Techniques 

Details on measurement techniques and instructions for making menu 
selections are generally not included in these procedures. Comprehensive 
descriptions of menus and oscilloscope features are located in the 1 1801C 
Digital Sampling Oscilloscope User Manual. 

User Manual 

A review of the 1 1801C Digital Sampling Oscilloscope User Manual is 
strongly recommended to familiarize the first-time user with oscilloscope 
controls and features. 



5-6 



Adjustment Procedures 





Adjustments 



Power Supply 



This procedure shows the setup and lists the steps to examine the Mea- 
sured Voltage Supply and to check/adjust the Voltage Reference and the 
Regulator Reference (see Figures 5-1, 5-2, and 5-3). 




This procedure should only be performed if the instrument is out of 
measurement limits and maintenance is required. If the oscilloscope 
is already within limits, proceed to the Display procedure. 



Measurement Limits 

The measurement limits for this procedure are as follows: 

■ Measured Voltage Supply limits must be within -t-4.85 V and -t-5.25 V 

■ Voltage Reference must be within -t-5.15 V and -1-5.25 V 

■ Regulator Reference must be within -1-9.95 V and -l- 1 0.05 V 

Setup to Examine Voitage Suppiy 



11801C 




Procedure to Examine Voitage Suppiy 

I I Step 1 : Set the oscilloscope ON/STANDBY switch to ON, and initialize 



as follows: 

UTILITY button press 

Initialize (in major menu) touch 

Initialize (in verification pop-up menu) touch 



I I Step 2: With the oscilloscope top and bottom covers removed, refer to 
the Maintenance section and locate the A18 Memory board. 



11 801 C Service Manual 



5-7 






Adjustments 



I I Step 3: Connect the digital multimeter to TP200 and TP300 as indicated 
in the setup illustration (see also Figure 5-1). 

I I Step 4: Check that the Digital Voltmeter reads within the limits of 
-I-4.85 V and -I-5.25 V. 



TP200 VCC TP300 GND 




Lithium Battery 
(BT150) 



Figure 5-1 : A18 Memory Board Test Point Locations 



5-8 



Adjustment Procedures 






Adjustments 



Setup to Examine/Adjust Voltage Reference 



11801C 





This procedure should only be performed if maintenance is required. 
This is not necessary for verifying instrument specifications. 



Procedure to Examine/Adjust Voltage Reference 

I I Step1: Perform the following settings in the order listed: 

a. Set the front panel ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY and the rear 
panel PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH to OFF. Disconnect the oscillo- 
scope from the power source. 

b. Remove the Power Supply module following the procedure listed 
under Power Supply Module Removal/Replacement in the Mainte- 
nance section. 

c. Create a short between test points TP830 and TP831 on the A2A2 
Control Rectifier board using a shorting strap. See Figure 5-2. 

d. Connect the oscilloscope Power Supply module to a suitable line 
power source. 

e. Set the rear panel PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH to ON. 

I I Step 2: With the Digital Voltmeter set to DC Voltage and connected as 

indicated in the setup diagram, check that the multimeter reads within 

the limits of -1-5.1 5 and -t-5.25 V. 

DO NOT attempt to change the following -I-5.2 V Ref setting if the 
reading is within the stated limits. Proceed to Step 4. 

^VARNIN^ 




To prevent electric shock, use extreme caution when making the 
following adjustment. 



11801C Service Manual 



5-9 








Adjustments 



□ 

□ 

□ 

□ 

□ 

□ 



Step 3: Adjust the +5.2 V Ref, R800, on the A2A2 Control Rectifier 
board to +5.20 V. 

Step 4: Remove the Digital Voltmeter leads from the test points. 

Step 5: Set the rear panel PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH to OFF. 

Step 6: Disconnect the oscilloscope from the power source. 

Step 7: Remove all test leads and the TP830/831 shorting strap. 

Step 8: Replace the Power Supply module using the instructions in the 
Maintenance section. 



□ Step 9: Set the rear panel PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH to ON, and the 
front panel ON/STANDBY switch to ON. 




R800 
+5.2 V 
REF 



TP701 



TP831 



TP830 



Figure 5-2: A2A2 Control Rectifier Board Test Point and Adjustment Locations 



5-10 



Adjustment Procedures 






Adjustments 



Setup to Examine/Adjust Regulator Reference 



11801C 




Procedure to Examine/Adjust Regulator Reference 

□ Step 1 : Make the connections shown in the setup and Figure 5-3 dia- 
grams. Check that the oscilloscope power is ON. 

I I Step 2: With the Digital Voltmeter in DC Voltage mode, check the Volt- 
meter for a reading within the limits of -t-9.95 V and -i- 10.05 V. 

DO NOT attempt to make the following adjustment to R730 if the 
reading is within the stated limits. Instead, proceed to Step 4. 



WARNING 




To prevent electric shock, use extreme caution when making the 
following adjustment. Access the test points from the right side of 
the oscilloscope. 



I I Step 3: Adjust the -i-IO V Ref, R730, on the A4 Regulator board to 
-1-10.00 V. 

I I Step 4: Remove the test leads. 

I I Step 5: Initiate Power-On Diagnostics (see the Performance Verification 
section). 



11801C Service Manual 



5-11 








5-12 Adjustment Procedures 




Adjustments 



Display 



This procedure shows the setup and lists the steps to examine/adjust the A7 
CRT Socket board and the A8 CRT Driver board (see Figures 5-4 and 5-5). 




The adjustments in this procedure affect only the visual aspects of 
the CRT display and you should only perform these adjustments 
when the CRT, A7 CRT Socket board or A8 CRT Driver board com- 
ponents are replaced. These adjustments do not affect oscilloscope 
accuracy since all measurements are made on the acquired data, 
not the displayed data. Unless alignment or brightness difficulties 
are apparent, proceed to the Real Time Clock procedure. 



For all Examine steps in this procedure, if the display parameter examined is 
within the stated limits, then do not perform the Adjust step following that 
Examine step. Instead, proceed to the step following the Adjust step. 



Measurement Limits 

The measurement limits are set on the CRT as follows: 

■ The display must be visible (not cut off). 

■ The red, green, and blue traces must not be separated. 

■ Focus is adjusted for minimum line width. 

■ Vertical size is adjusted to align the corners of the grid pattern with the 
tic marks on the edges of the front panel bezel. 

■ Horizontal size is adjusted to align the corners of the grid pattern with 
the tic marks on the top and bottom edges of the front panel bezel, and 
the horizontal linearity is adjusted for uniform grid box length. 

■ Horizontal linearity is adjusted for optimum appearance using an inter- 
nally generated grid pattern. 

■ Red, green, and blue colors must have optimum white to gray scale 
linearity. 

■ Red Display, Green Disply, and Blue Display in Extended Diagnostics 
must not contain severe color impurities. 



11801C Service Manual 



5-13 





Adjustments 



Setup to Examine/Adjust the Display 



11801C 




Procedure to Examine/Adjust the Display 



To prevent electric shock, use extreme caution when performing 
the following adjustment. 



I I Step1: Perform the following settings in the order listed: 

11801C 

ON/STANDBY STANDBY 

I I Step 2: Remove the top and bottom cabinet panel covers. 

I I Step 3: Remove the three screws that secure the CRT cover, and then 
remove the cover. 

I I Step 4: Remove the two screws that secure the cover that shields the 
A7 CRT Socket board (CRT Socket board cover). 

r~| Step 5: Set the ON/STANDBY switch to ON. 

I I Step 6: Examine that the display is visible. 

□ Step 7: Adjust SCREEN, located on the transformer mounted to the A8 
CRT Driver board, clockwise until the display appears. 

r~| steps: Press the UTILITY button. 

r~| Step 9: Touch Extended Diagnostic, then touch Extended Diagnostic 
in the Verify Diagnostics pop-up menu. 

r~| Step 10: Touch Biock and then Front Panei. 

r~| Step 1 1 : Touch Area and then Test Pattern. 

r~| Step 12: Touch Routine and then White Grid. 



5-14 



Adjustment Procedures 






Adjustments 



I I Step 13: Touch Run in the major menu. 

I I Step 14: Examine that the primary colors (red, green, and blue) are not 
separated in the white grid pattern. 



WARNING 



To prevent electric shock, do not touch the back side of the A7 CRT 
Socket board. Use extreme caution when performing the following 
adjustment. 

r~| Step 15: y4c//usf CONVERGENCE, R210, on the A7 CRT Socket board 
for the optimum vertical convergence of the red, green, and blue colors. 

I I Step 16: Examine that the grid pattern is focused. 

I I Step 17: Adjust FOCUS, located on the transformer mounted on the A8 
CRT Driver board, for the optimum focus of the white grid pattern. 

I I Step 18: Examine that the grid is aligned with the top and bottom tic 
marks along the inside vertical edge of the front panel bezel. To elimi- 
nate any parallax error, look directly ahead at the CRT, and then align 
the top of the grid with the top vertical tic mark and the bottom of the 
grid with the bottom tic mark. 

r~| Step 1 9: Adjust VERT SIZE, L321 , and VERT PCS, R31 1 , on the A8 CRT 
Driver board to align the grid with the tic marks along the inside vertical 
edge of the front panel bezel. 

I I Step 20: Examine that the grid is aligned with the horizontal tic marks at 
the top and bottom of the front panel bezel and that the grid boxes are 
of uniform length throughout the grid pattern. 

□ Step 21: Adjust H SIZE, R501 ; H LIN, R502; and H PCS, R500, on the 
A8 CRT Driver board for best overall linearity and position. Use the 
horizontal tic marks at the top and bottom of the front panel bezel to 
align the grid. 

I I Step 22: H-SIZE, H-LIN, and H-POS potentiometers interact, so you 
may need to repeat Steps 20 and 21 until they are all correctly adjusted. 

r~| Step 23: Touch Exit to return to the Routine menu of the Extended 
Diagnostic menu structure. 

r~| Step 24: Touch Gray Scaie in the Routine menu. 

I I Step 25: Touch Run in the major menu. 



11801C Service Manual 



5-15 






Adjustments 



I I Step 26: Exam/ne that the color scale is white at the top, gray at the 
bottom, and the background on the right side of the display is cut off 
(that is, the vertical raster lines are not visible on the right side of the 
display). 



I I Step 27: Adjust Red, R200; Green, R201 ; and Blue, R203, on the A7 
CRT Socket board fully counterclockwise. 

I I Step 28: Adjust SCREEN, located on the transformer that is mounted 
on the A8 CRT Driver board, so that the bottom block of the gray scale 
is visible but the background on the right side of the display is still cut 
off. 

□ Step 29: Note which color (red, green, or blue) appears most promi- 
nently in the display. DO NOT adjust this color in the following step. 

□ Step 30: Adjust RED, R200; GREEN, R201 ; or BLUE, R203, on the A7 
CRT Socket board for a pure white to gray scale display. Only adjust the 
colors that do not appear prominent. For example, if the display appears 
to be more red, then adjust the GREEN and BLUE potentiometers. 

NOTE 

SCREEN may have to be adjusted slightly if any of the colors are 
adjusted. If the vertical raster lines are visible in the background, 
then adjust SCREEN so that the background is just cut off, but the 
bottom gray box is still visible. 

□ Step 31: Touch Exit to return to the Extended Diagnostic menu struc- 
ture. 

□ Stop 32i Touch Red Displey, 3.nd thon touch Run. 

I I Step 33: Examine the red display for any severe color impurities. 

r~| Step 34: Touch Exit to return to the Extended Diagnostics menu 
structure. 

r~| Step 35: Touch Green Dispiy and then touch Run. 

□ Step 36: Examine the green display for any severe color impurities. 

r~| Step 37: Touch Exit to return to the Extended Diagnostic menu struc- 
ture. 

r~| Step 38: Touch Biue Dispiay and then touch Run. 

I I Step 39: Examine the blue display for any severe color impurities. 






If the gray scale meets the previous conditions, do not perform the 
adjustments in Steps 27, 28, and 30. Proceed to Step 31 . 



5-16 



Adjustment Procedures 





Adjustments 



r~l Step 40: If any of the color displays (that is, the Red Display, Green 
Disply, or Blue Display) showed severe color impurities, then perform 
the following to restore the color purity: 

■ Ensure that the oscilloscope environment is free of all external 
magnetic fields. For example, a magnetic screwdriver near the 
oscilloscope could cause color impurities on the screen. 

■ Set the ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY. 

■ Wait 1 0 seconds, then set the ON/STANDBY switch to ON. 

■ Examine the color displays again, and verify that the color impurities 
are removed. 

NOTE 

When the oscilloscope is moved in the earth’s magnetic field, color 
impurities will appear on the display. This is normal. To remove the 
impurity, repeat Step 40. 

□ Step 41: Set the ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY. 

I I Step 42: Replace the CRT Socket board cover and the CRT cover. 



11801C Service Manual 



5-17 





Adjustments 



FOCUS SCREEN 




Figure 5-4: A8 CRT Driver Board Adjustment Locations 



5-18 



Adjustment Procedures 






Adjustments 



GREEN 

R201 



RED 

R200 




BLUE 

R203 



CONVERGENCE 

R210 



Figure 5-5: A7 CRT Socket Board Adjustment Locations 



11801C Service Manual 



5-19 






Adjustments 



Real Time Clock 



This procedure verifies the correct operation and accuracy of the oscillo- 
scope’s input/output systems (see Figure 5-6). 




This procedure should be performed only if maintenance is required. 
Its use is not necessary for verifying instrument specifications. 



Measurement Limits 

The measurement limit for the real time clock is 1 ,000,000 ps ±5 ps. 

Setup to Examine/Adjust Reai Time Ciock 



CH 1 




Procedure to Examine/Adjust Reai Time Ciock 

I I Step 1 : Initialize the oscilloscope settings as follows: 



UTILITY button press 

Initialize (in major menu) touch 

Initialize (in verification pop-up menu) touch 



5-20 



Adjustment Procedures 







Adjustments 



I I Step 2: Perform the following operations in the order given: 

■ Set the front panel ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY 

■ Remove the L bracket on the front of the card cage. 

■ Remove both plastic retaining strips from the top of card cage. 

■ Remove the A1 7 Main Processor board, and then install it in the 
fourth slot from the outer edge. 

■ Remove the A29 Memory Expansion board, and then install it in the 
third slot. 

■ Remove the A1 4 Input/Output (I/O) board, and then install it in 
second slot. 

■ Move the A1 8 Memory board from the first slot to the fifth slot. 

■ Reconnect all the cables to the A1 4 I/O board. 

■ Set the oscilloscope front panel ON/STANDBY switch to ON. 

I I Step 3: Connect the Frequency Counter as indicated in the setup 

diagram (see also Figure 5-6), and set the controls as follows: 



Frequency counter 

Mode Period 

Trigger DC 

Slope - (negative) 

Time Base 1 MHz 

I I Step 4: Make the following oscilloscope selections: 

UTILITY button press 

Page to Enhanced Accuracy (in major menu) touch 

Page to Utility2 (in major menu) touch 

Extended Diagnostics (in major menu) touch 

Extended Diagnostics (in pop-up menu) touch 

Block (in major menu) touch 

input/Output (in pop-up menu) touch 

Area (in major menu) touch 

Reai Time Cik (in pop-up menu) touch 

Routine (in major menu) touch 

Caiibrate (in pop-up menu) touch 

Run (in major menu) touch 



I I steps: £xam/ne that the frequency counter reads within the limits of 
999,995 ps and 1 ,000,005 ps. 

DO NOT attempt to optimize the Real Time Clock setting if the 
period is within the stated limits. Proceed to Step 7. 

r~| Step 6: Adjust Real Time Clock, 051 0, for 1 ,000,000 ps. 



11801C Service Manual 



5-21 





Adjustments 



□ 

□ 

□ 



Step 7: Remove the frequency counter from the power module. 

Step 8: Set the oscilloscope ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY. 

Step 9: Replace the circuit boards (rearranged in Step 1) in their origi- 
nal positions. 



C510 



Real Time 

TP31 Ground Clock 




5-22 



Adjustment Procedures 




Preventive Maintenance 



Regular maintenance can prevent instrument breakdown and may improve 
the reliability of the instrument. The environment in which the instrument 
operates will determine the frequency of maintenance. A convenient time for 
doing preventive maintenance is prior to performing an electrical adjust- 
ment. 



Removing the 
Cabinet Paneis 



WARNING 



To prevent electric shock when operating the instrument with the 
covers removed, do not touch exposed connections or compo- 
nents. Dangerous potentials exist at several points throughout this 
instrument. 

To avoid electric shock, disconnect the power before cleaning the 
instrument or replacing any parts. Some transistors have voltages 
present on their cases. 



The top and bottom cabinet panels (or covers) protect you from operating 
potentials present within the instrument. In addition, the panels reduce 
radiation of electromagnetic interference from the instrument. To remove the 
panels, loosen the fasteners and lift the panels off. Operate the instrument 
with the panels in place to protect the interior from dust. 



11 801 C Service Manual 



6-1 






Preventive Maintenance 



Cleaning the 
Instrument 



The instrument should be cleaned as often as operating conditions require. 
Dirt in the instrument can cause overheating and component breakdown. 
Dirt on components acts as an insulating blanket and prevents efficient heat 
dissipation. Dirt also provides an electrical conduction path which may 
cause the instrument to fail. The side panels reduce the amount of dust that 
reaches the interior of the instrument. Keep the side panels in place for 
safety and cooling. 




Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents which might damage the 
plastics used in this instrument. Use a nonresidue type of cleaner, 
preferably isopropyl alcohol or totally denatured ethyl alcohol. 
Before using any other type of cleaner, consult your local Tektronix 
service center or representative. 



Exterior 

Dust on the instrument can be removed with a soft cloth or small brush. The 
brush is also useful for dislodging dirt on and around the front panel con- 
trols. Dirt which remains can be removed with a soft cloth dampened in a 
mild detergent and water solution. Do not use abrasive cleaners. 

CRT 

Faceplates are cleaned with a soft, lint-free cloth dampened with denatured 
alcohol. 



6-2 



Maintenance 






Preventive Maintenance 



Visual Inspection 



Periodic Electrical 
Adjustment 



Interior 

Cleaning should seldom be necessary. To clean the interior, blow off the 
dust with dry, low-velocity air (approximately 5 Ib/in2). Remove any dirt which 
remains with a soft brush or a cloth dampened with a mild detergent and 
water solution. A cotton-tipped applicator is useful for cleaning in narrow 
spaces, or for cleaning more delicate circuit components. After cleaning, 
use a washcloth dampened with water to remove any residue. 




Circuit boards and components must be dry before appiying pow- 
er, to prevent damage from electricai arcing. 

The high-voltage circuits should receive special attention. Exces- 
sive dirt in these circuits may cause high-voltage arcing and result 
in improper instrument operation. 



The instrument should be inspected occasionally for defects such as broken 
connections, improperly seated semiconductors, damaged or improperly 
installed circuit boards, and heat-damaged parts. The corrective procedure 
for most visible defects is obvious; however, particular care must be taken if 
heat-damaged parts are found. Since overheating usually indicates other 
trouble in the instrument, correcting the cause of overheating is important to 
prevent the damage from reoccurring. 



To ensure accurate measurements, check the electrical adjustment of this 
instrument after each 2,000 hours of operation or every 24 months if used 
infrequently. 



11801C Service Manual 



6-3 






Preventive Maintenance 



6-4 



Maintenance 





Corrective Maintenance 



Power Supply Voltage 
Hazard 



Ordering Parts 



Corrective maintenance consists of module and board replacement proce- 
dure for repairing the instrument. 



Use caution if working near any metal-faced part in the Power Supply mod- 
ule. 



WARNIN^ 



All metal components, Including any metal-faced ones, In the 
Power Supply module should be considered hazardous because 
these components may be at the AC line voltage potential. 

Always remove the line power cord before attempting any disas- 
sembly procedures. 

An electric-shock hazard exists when the instrument is not 
grounded. Do not remove the ground wire (green-yellow) that 
connects the Power Supply module chassis to the instrument. 



When ordering replacement parts from Tektronix, Inc., include the following 
information: 

■ instrument type 

■ instrument serial number 

■ a description of the part 

■ Tektronix part number 



11801C Service Manual 



6-5 






Corrective Maintenance 



Static-Sensitive 
Device Ciassification 




Static discharge can damage any semiconductor component in this 
instrument. Foilow the precautions in this section to prevent dam- 
age. 



This instrument contains electrical components that are susceptible to 
damage from static discharge. See Table 6-1 for the relative susceptibility of 
various classes of semiconductors. Static voltages of 1 kV to 30 kV are 
common in unprotected environments. 



Table 6-1 : Relative Susceptibility to Damage from Static Discharge 



Semiconductor Classes 


Relative 

Susceptibility 

Levels^ 


MOS or CMOS microcircuits, and discrete or linear 
microcircuits with MOS inputs (most sensitive) 


100 V to 500 V 


ECL 


200 V to 500 V 


Schottky signal diodes 


250 V 


Schottky TTL 


500 V 


High-frequency bipolar transistors 


400 V to 600 V 


JFETs 


600 V to 800 V 


Linear microcircuits 


400 V to 1000 V 
(est.) 


Low-power Schottky TTL 


900 V 


TTL (least sensitive) 


1200 V 



1 Voltage discharged from a 100 pF capacitor through a resistance of 100 fl 



6-6 



Maintenance 





Corrective Maintenance 



Observe the following precautions to avoid damage: 

■ Minimize handling of static-sensitive components. 

■ Transport and store static-sensitive components or assemblies in their 
original containers, anti-static tube rail, or conductive foam. Label any 
package that contains static-sensitive assemblies or components. 

■ Discharge the static voltage from your body by wearing a wrist strap 
while handling these components. Servicing static-sensitive assemblies 
or components should be performed only at a static-free work station by 
qualified service personnel. We recommend using the static control mat; 
refer to Table 4-2 for the part numbers of this test equipment. 

■ Keep the work station surface free of anything that can generate or hold 
a static charge. 

■ Keep the component leads shorted together whenever possible by 
storing them in conductive foam or rails. 

■ Pick up components by the body, never by the leads. 

■ Do not slide the components over any surface. 

■ Avoid handling components in areas that have a floor or work-surface 
covering that can generate a static charge. 



11801C Service Manual 



6-7 





Corrective Maintenance 



Use Table 6-2 as a convenient reference for finding connector and screw 
locations when removing and replacing field replaceable units (FRUs). The 
first column in the table lists the FRU to be removed or replaced, and the 
second column lists the figures that you should reference for the location of 
connector and screw locations discussed in the procedure to remove/re- 
place this FRU. 



Table 6-2: FRU Removal/Replacement Figure Cross Reference 



FRU to be Removed/ 
Replaced 


Figures to Reference During Removal 


Page 


Power Supply Module 


Figure 6-2 


Removing the Power Supply Rear Plate, Fan Housing, 
and Rear Panel Connector Plate 


. .. 6-16 




Figure 6-3 


A2A2 Control Rectifier Board Connectors Locations .... 


. .. 6-17 


Fan Motor 


Figure 6-2 


Removing the Power Supply Rear Plate, Fan Housing, 
and Rear Panel Connector Plate 


. .. 6-16 



Removing/Replacing the Cathode Ray Tube 6-24 

Removing/Replacing the A8 CRT Driver Board 6-39 

Removing/Replacing the A10 Front Panel 

Button Board 6-43 

Multi-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 
Indexing Diagram 6-74 

Acquisition Unit Figure 6-23 Removing/Replacing the A1 9 Strobe/TDR 

Buffer Board 

Figure 6-26 Removing/Replacing the A26 M/F Acquisition 

Interconnect Board 

Figure 6-32 Multi-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 
Indexing Diagram 

Batteries Figure 6-1 0 Removing/Replacing the A5 Time Base/ 



Controller Board 6-36 

Figure 6-19 Removing/Replacing the A14 I/O Board 6-50 

Figure 6-22 Removing/Replacing the A18 Memory Board 6-56 



A1 Mainframe (M/F) Strobe Figure 6-8 Removing/Replacing the A1 M/F Strobe Drive Board 6-31 

Drive Board Figure 6-32 Multi-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 

Indexing Diagram 6-74 



A3 Mainframe (M/F) Power Figure 6-2 Removing the Power Supply Rear Plate, Fan Housing, 

Connect Board and Rear Panel Connector Plate 6-16 

Figure 6-3 A2A2 Control Rectifier Board Connectors Locations 6-17 

Figure 6-9 Removing/Replacing the A4 Regulator Board 6-33 

Figure 6-1 0 Removing/Replacing the A5 Time Base/ 

Controller Board 6-36 

Figure 6-19 Removing/Replacing the A14 I/O Board 6-50 

Figure 6-23 Removing/Replacing the A1 9 Strobe/TDR 

Buffer Board 6-58 



6-58 

6-61 

6-74 



Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) Figure 6-5 

Figure 6-12 
Figure 6-15 

Figure 6-32 



Removing and 
Replacing FRUs 



6-8 



Maintenance 













Corrective Maintenance 



Table 6-2: FRU Removal/Replacement Figure Cross Reference (Cont.) 

FRU to be Removed/ Figures to Reference During Removal Page 

Replaced 

A4 Regulator Board Figure 6-2 Removing the Power Supply Rear Plate, Fan Housing, 

and Rear Panel Connector Plate 6-16 

Figure 6-3 A2A2 Control Rectifier Board Connectors Locations 6-17 

Figure 6-9 Removing/Replacing the A4 Regulator Board 6-33 

Figure 6-32 Multi-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 

Indexing Diagram 6-74 



A5 Time Base/Controller Figure 6-10 Removing/Replacing the A5 Time Base/Controller Board 

Board and A6 Calibrator Board 6-36 

Figure 6-32 Multi-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 

Indexing Diagram 6-74 



A6 Calibrator Board Figure 6-10 Removing/Replacing the A5 Time Base/Controller Board 

and A6 Calibrator Board (Steps 1 and 2 only) 6-36 

A7 CRT Socket Board Figure 6-1 1 Removing/Replacing the A7 CRT Driver Board 6-38 

Figure 6-32 Multi-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 

Indexing Diagram 6-74 

A8 CRT Driver Board Figure 6-5 Removing/Replacing the Cathode Ray Tube 6-24 

Figure 6-12 Removing/Replacing the A8 CRT Driver Board 6-39 

Figure 6-1 5 Removing/Replacing the A1 0 Front Panel 

Button Board 6-43 

Figure 6-32 Multi-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 

Indexing Diagram 6-74 



A9 Touch Panel Assembly Figure 6-5 Removing/Replacing the Cathode Ray Tube 6-24 

Figure 6-1 5 Removing/Replacing the A1 0 Front Panel 

Button Board 6-43 

Figure 6-32 Multi-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 

Indexing Diagram 6-74 

A10 Front Panel Control Figure 6-5 Removing/Replacing the Cathode Ray Tube 6-24 

Board Figure 6-1 5 Removing/Replacing the A1 0 Front Panel 

Button Board 6-43 

Figure 6-32 Multi-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 

Indexing Diagram 6-74 

A1 1 Front Panel Button Figure 6-5 Removing/Replacing the Cathode Ray Tube 6-24 

Board Figure 6-1 5 Removing/Replacing the A1 0 Front Panel 

Button Board 6-43 

Figure 6-1 6 Removing/Replacing the A1 1 Front Panel 

Button Board 6-44 

Figure 6-32 Multi-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 

Indexing Diagram 6-74 

A1 2 Rear Panel Assembly Figure 6-5 Removing/Replacing the Cathode Ray Tube 6-24 

Figure 6-17 Removing/Replacing the A12 Rear Panel Assembly 6-46 

Figure 6-32 Multi-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 

Indexing Diagram 6-74 



11801C Service Manual 



6-9 















Corrective Maintenance 



Table 6-2: FRU Removal/Replacement Figure Cross Reference (Cont.) 

FRU to be Removed/ Figures to Reference During Removal Page 

Replaced 

A1 3 Mother Board Figure 6-7 Top View of the Card Cage 6-30 

Figure 6-18 Removing/Replacing the A13 Mother Board 6-48 

Figure 6-19 Removing/Replacing the A14 I/O Board 6-50 

Figure 6-32 Multi-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 

Indexing Diagram 6-74 



A1 4 Input/Output (I/O) Figure 6-7 Top View of the Card Cage 6-30 

Board Figure 6-19 Removing/Replacing the A1 4 I/O Board 6-50 

Figure 6-32 Multi-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 

Indexing Diagram 6-74 



A1 5 Memory Manager Unit Figure 6-7 Top View of the Card Cage 6-30 

(MMU) Board Figure 6-20 Removing/Replacing the A1 5 MMU Board 6-52 

Figure 6-32 Multi-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 

Indexing Diagram 6-74 

A1 7 Main Processor Board Figure 6-7 Top View of the Card Cage 6-30 

Figure 6-21 Removing/Replacing the A1 7 Main 

Processor Board 6-54 

Figure 6-32 Multi-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 

Indexing Diagram 6-74 



A1 8 Memory Board Figure 6-7 Top View of the Card Cage 6-30 

Figure 6-22 Removing/Replacing the A18 Memory Board 6-56 



A1 9 Strobe/TDR Buffer Figure 6-23 Removing/Replacing the A1 9 Strobe/TDR 

Board Buffer Board 6-58 

Figure 6-26 Removing/Replacing the A26 M/F Acquisition 

Interconnect Board 6-61 

Figure 6-32 Multi-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 

Indexing Diagram 6-74 



A20-A23 Head Interconnect Figure 6-23 Removing/Replacing the A1 9 Strobe/TDR 

Boards Buffer Board 6-58 

Figure 6-24 Removing/Replacing the A20-A23 Head 

Interconnect Boards 6-59 

Figure 6-25 Removing/Replacing the Front Subpanel Assembly 6-60 

Figure 6-26 Removing/Replacing the A26 M/F Acquisition 

Interconnect Board 6-61 

Figure 6-28 Removing/Replacing the A24/A27 Acquisition 

Analog Boards 6-63 

Figure 6-29 Removing/Replacing the A25/A28 Acquisition 

MPU Boards 6-64 

Figure 6-32 Multi-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 

Indexing Diagram 6-74 



6-70 



Maintenance 













Corrective Maintenance 



Table 6-2: FRU Removal/Replacement Figure Cross Reference (Cont.) 

FRU to be Removed/ Figures to Reference During Removal Page 

Replaced 

A26 Mainframe (M/F) Figure 6-23 Removing/Repiacing the A1 9 Strobe/TDR 

Acquisition interconnect Buffer Board 6-58 

Board Figure 6-25 Removing/Repiacing the Front Subpanei Assembiy 6-60 

Figure 6-26 Removing/Repiacing the A26 M/F Acquisition 

interconnect Board 6-61 

Figure 6-27 Top View of the A26 M/F Acquisition interconnect Board . . . 6-62 

Figure 6-28 Removing/Repiacing the A24/A27 Acquisition Anaiog 

Boards 6-63 

Figure 6-29 Removing/Repiacing the A25/A28 Acquisition 

MPU Boards 6-64 

Figure 6-32 Muiti-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 

indexing Diagram 6-74 

A24/A27 Acquisition Anaiog Figure 6-23 Removing/Repiacing the A1 9 Strobe/TDR 

Boards Buffer Board 6-58 

Figure 6-26 Removing/Repiacing the A26 M/F Acquisition 

interconnect Board 6-61 

Figure 6-28 Removing/Repiacing the A24/A27 Acquisition Anaiog 

Boards 6-63 

Figure 6-32 Muiti-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 

indexing Diagram 6-74 



A25/A28 Acquisition MPU Figure 6-23 Removing/Repiacing the A1 9 Strobe/TDR 

Boards Buffer Board 6-58 

Figure 6-26 Removing/Repiacing the A26 M/F Acquisition 

interconnect Board 6-61 

Figure 6-29 Removing/Repiacing the A25/A28 Acquisition 

MPU Boards 6-64 

Figure 6-32 Muiti-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 

indexing Diagram 6-74 

Firmware iCs Figure 6-30 FRU iC Detaii 6-67 

Figure 6-32 Muiti-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 

indexing Diagram 6-74 

Seriai Data interface (SDi) Figure 6-19 Removing/Repiacing the A14 i/0 Board 6-50 

IC Figure 6-32 Muiti-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor 

indexing Diagram 6-74 

Figure 6-31 iC insertion-Extraction Tooi 6-69 

Fuses Figure 6-37 Fuse Locations 6-107 



11801C Service Manual 



6-11 












Corrective Maintenance 



NOTE 



In addition to the figures listed in Table 6-2, the exploded-view 
drawings in the Parts List section may be helpful in removing or 
disassembling individual FRUs or subassemblies. Also, Figures 6-1 
and 6-30 are useful for determining the location of FRUs and 
FRU ICs. 



The top and/or bottom covers will need to be removed for most repairs. To 
loosen the cover fasteners, use a coin or a straight-slot screwdriver with a 
large-sized tip and rotate the cover fasteners a quarter turn counter-clock- 
wise. 

Whenever a specific area is mentioned (such as the right side), it will usually 
be in reference to the front of the instrument. If another reference is in- 
tended, it will be indicated (for example, viewing from the left side or viewing 
from the rear of the instrument). 

All connector names are labeled on the circuit board and/or on the connec- 
tors themselves. 



WARNIN^ 



To avoid electric-shock hazard and instrument damage, always 
disconnect the oscilloscope from its power source before remov- 
ing or replacing FRUs. For sampling head removal or replacement, 
switch the front panel ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY. 



6-12 



Maintenance 






Corrective Maintenance 



Electrical Lock-on of 
the Front Panel 
ON/STANDBY Power 
Switch 



Some applications of the oscilloscope may require that the power remain 
on. To electrically lock the power on, use the following procedure: 

□ Step 1 : Switch the rear panel PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH to OFF. 

r~| Step 2: Remove the AC power cable. 

I I Step 3: Position the instrument on its left (handle) side, as viewed from 
the front. 



□ 

□ 

□ 

□ 



Step 4: Remove the bottom cover. 

Step 5: Locate the A4 Regulator board. 

Step 6: Locate the J820 jumper on the A4 Regulator board. 

Step 7: Reposition the J820 jumper from its two outer (right side) pins 
to its two inner (left side) pins, without dropping the jumper. 



I I Step 8: Replace the bottom cover. Turn the instrument in the upright 
position. 



r~| Step 9: Reconnect the AC power cable and switch the PRINCIPAL 
POWER SWITCH to ON. 



The power will now remain on regardless of the setting of the ON/ 
STANDBY power switch. 




To prevent damage to the instrument andjor sampling head, do not 
install or remove a sampling head while the power is on. 



I I Step 10; To turn the power off while the ON/STANDBY power switch is 
disabled, use the rear panel PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH. 

To return to normal operation of the ON/STANDBY Power Switch, follow the 
preceding steps in reverse order. 



11801C Service Manual 



6-13 






Corrective Maintenance 



A25 

Acquisition 
MPU Board 




A24 

Acquisition 
Anaiog Board 

" A28 

Acquisition MPU 
vN. Board 



/ A21 

I Acquisition 

I Anainn Qoar 



Anaiog Board 



A19 

StrobeiTDR 
Buffer Board 



A26 

M/F Acquisition 
interconnect Board 



Figure 6-1: Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Locator (Cont.) 



11801C Service Manual 



6-15 




Corrective Maintenance 



Power Supply 
Module Removal/ 
Replacement 



The Power Supply module slides out of the rear of the oscilloscope for 
maintenance and troubleshooting. It may also be removed to gain better 
access to the A3 M/F Power Connect board or the A4 Regulator board. 

See Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3 for connector and screw locations. 



Power Supply Rear-plate Screws (4) Fan-housing Screws (4) 




Power Supply Rear-plate Screws (4) 



Rear Panel Connector-plate Screws (4) 




Rear Panel Connector-plate Screws (4) 



Figure 6-2: Removing the Power Suppiy Module, Fan Housing, and Rear Panel Connector Plate 



6-16 



Maintenance 






Corrective Maintenance 



J70 J81 J65 




Figure 6-3; A2A2 Control Rectifier Board Connector Locations 



To remove the Power Supply module from the oscilloscope, proceed as 

follows: 

□ Step 1 : Turn the instrument on its left side (as viewed facing the rear 
panel). The Power Supply module will now be at the bottom of the 
instrument. 

□ Step 2: Remove the eight Torx head screws that secure the power 
supply module. 

□ Step 3: Carefully pull the Power Supply module partially out of the 
instrument. Do not stretch taut or bind the wires attached to the A2A2 
Control Rectifier board connectors. 




To prevent damage to the connector pins, pull the Power Supply 
module only partially out of the instrument. 



11801C Service Manual 



6-17 







Corrective Maintenance 



I I Step 4: Remove the wire connectors from the pins on the A2A2 Control 
Rectifier board. 

I I Step 5: Remove the chassis ground (green-yellow) wire that is con- 
nected to the Power Supply module from the chassis of the instrument. 

r~l Step 6: Remove the Power Supply module. 

To replace the Power Supply module, perform the previous steps in the 
reverse order. 



NOTE 



Align the metal guides on the top of the Power Supply module with 
the grooves inside the upper part of the opening in the instrument. 

Be careful not to pinch any wires or interconnecting cables while 
installing the Power Supply module. 



6-18 



Maintenance 





Corrective Maintenance 



Fan Motor Removal/ 
Replacement 



See Figure 6-2 for connector and screw locations. 

Remove and replace the fan motor as follows: 

I I Step1: Using a pencil or tape, mark the top of the fan motor housing 
for later use in determining the position of the motor. Remove the four 
screws securing the housing to the rear of the instrument mainframe. 
Hold the housing as you remove the last screws. 

I I Step 2: Separate the grill and the housing from the motor. 

□ Step 3: Remove the two wires at their motor connections. Note that the 
red wire is (-I-) and the brown wire is (-). 

I I Step 4: Remove the fan motor. 



NOTE 



Observe the position in which the motor was mounted to ensure 
that the motor is remounted in its originai positioning, or the fan 
wires may not reach. 



To replace the fan motor, perform the previous steps in the reverse order, 
noting the following additional points while replacing the motor: 

■ use the mark from Step 1 to determine the original position of the motor 

■ tighten the screws securely 

■ remove the mark from the top of the housing 

■ check that no wires contact the fan blades 




To prevent damage to the fan connection, be carefui not to pinch 
the wires under the fan housing. 



11801C Service Manual 



6-19 






Corrective Maintenance 



Cathode Ray Tube 
(CRT) Removal/ 
Replacement 



WARNING 



The cathode ray tube (CRT) may retain a dangerous electrical 
(16 kV) charge. To prevent electric shock, fully discharge the anode 
before removing the CRT. Short the anode lead from the CRT to the 
chassis. Wait approximately ten minutes and again firmly short the 
anode lead to the chassis. Then, remove the CRT 

If the CRT breaks, the glass fragments scatter at a high velocity 
(implosion). Use extreme care when handling the CRT. Protective 
clothing and safety glasses should be worn. Avoid striking the CRT 
on any object which might cause it to crack or implode. When 
storing a CRT, place It In a protective carton or set the CRT face 
down in a protected location with smooth surface and with the CRT 
faceplate on a soft mat. 



See Figures 6-1 , 6-4, 6-5, 6-6, 6-7, 6-13, and 6-32 for module, connector, 

screw, and index locations. 

Remove the CRT as follows: 

I I Step 1 : Remove the three Torx head screws that secure the CRT cover, 
and then the CRT cover. 

I I Step 2: Set the instrument in the inverted position. 

I I Step 3: Use a 1/1 6-inch Allen wrench to loosen the two small screws 
that secure the two control knobs. Carefully remove the control so 
knobs that you do not lose the small Allen screws inside the knobs. 

I CAUTION I 



When replacing the two control knobs, do not overtighten the two 
Allen screws. 

I I Step 4: Remove the two Torx head screws on the bottom of the A9 
Touch Panel Assembly. 

I I Step 5: Lift up on the bottom of the A9 Touch Panel Assembly and 

swing the assembly outward. The top of the A9 Touch Panel Assembly is 
held in place with two tabs that hook under the top of the chassis. Pull 
the assembly out until you can access the black ground wire that con- 
nects the A9 Touch Panel Assembly to the instrument chassis. 

I I Step 6: Remove the quick-disconnect ground connector that connects 
the black ground wire to the instrument chassis. 



6-20 



Maintenance 







Corrective Maintenance 



I I Step 7: Set the A9 Touch Panel Assembly aside. To avoid stressing the 
ribbon cable that is still connected to the A9 Touch Panel Assembly and 
to keep the assembly from cluttering your work space, place the A9 
Touch Panel Assembly on top of the sampling head compartments. Do 
not damage the A9 Touch Panel Assembly when placing it on top of the 
sampling head plug-in compartments. 

I I Step 8: Carefully set the instrument on its left side. 

I I Step 9: Remove the two plastic circuit board guides from the top of the 
card cage. 

I I Step 1 0: Remove the two Torx head screws that secure the A7 CRT 
Socket board cover. Use a short Torx head screwdriver to remove the 
rear-most Torx head screw. 

I I Step 1 1 : Remove the A7 CRT Socket board cover. 

I I Step 12: Slowly pull the A7 CRT Socket board towards the rear of the 
instrument to unplug the A7 CRT Socket board from the CRT. 

NOTE 

When reattaching the A 7 CRT Socket board to the CRT, align the 
pins of the CRT to the receptacles on the A7 CRT Socket board. 

Then, slowly push the pins into the receptacles. 

Do not force the connection into place; doing so can bend or break 
some of the pins. If the pins do not slide easily into the receptacles, 
then pull the A7 CRT Socket board away from the CRT, and realign 
the A7 CRT Socket board to the CRT. 



^VARNIN^ 

The CRT anode voltage is 16 kV. To avoid electric shock, ground 
the anode lead from the CRT to the chassis to remove any stored 
charge remaining in the CRT. Wait approximately ten minutes. Then, 
ground the anode load to the chassis again. 

I I Step 13: Remove connector J54 from the A8 CRT Driver board. Note 
the position of the multi-pin connector’s index triangle to ensure that you 
can correctly replace the connector. 

I I Step 14: Remove the four Torx head screws that secure the CRT to the 
top of the instrument chassis. Two of the screws are removed from the 
front of the front panel chassis and two of the screws are removed from 
behind the front panel casting. 



11801C Service Manual 



6-21 






Corrective Maintenance 



I I Step 15: Remove the top CRT support bar from the instrument. The 
CRT support bar is not attached once the four Torx head screws secur- 
ing the top of the CRT are removed. 

□ Step 1 6: Remove the four Torx head screws that secure the CRT to the 
bottom of the instrument chassis. Two of the screws are removed from 
the front of the front panel chassis, and two of the screws are removed 
from behind the front panel casting. 

I I Step 17: Remove the bottom CRT support bar from the instrument. 

I CAUTION I 



Once the four Torx head screws are removed from the bottom of 
the CRT, the CRT is not attached to the instrument. Use care to not 
damage the CRT white it is loose in the instrument. 

I I Step 18: Slowly pull the CRT out of the front panel chassis. 

To replace the CRT, perform the previous steps in reverse order. 

NOTE 



Replacing the CRT will require that the instrument be readjusted. 



6-22 



Maintenance 






Corrective Maintenance 



A7 CRT Socket 



A7 CRT Socket Board Cover 

Board Cover Tone Head Screws (2) 




Figure 6-5: Removing/Replacing the Cathode Ray Tube 



6-24 



Maintenance 







11 801 C Service Manual 



6-25 




Corrective Maintenance 



Acquisition Unit 

Removai/ 

Repiacement 



See Figures 6-23, 6-26, and 6-32 for connector, screw, and index locations. 

Remove and replace the Acquisition unit as follows (the Acquisition unit can 
be removed with the instrument in the normal upright position for all steps): 




Lifting the trim covers to remove them wiil break the trim covers. 
There is a clip on the inside of the trim cover which slides over the 
end of the side frame section. To remove the trim covers, move 
each cover toward the end of the instrument where it is located. 
(The front cover moves forward and the rear cover moves back- 
ward.) Moving the clip about 1/8-inch wili release the cover. Then, 
the cover can be removed from the instrument. 



I I Step 1 : Remove the bolt from the top of the chassis, just behind the 
front casting. 

I I Step 2: Remove the trim covers from the right side (as viewed from the 
front of the instrument). 

I I Step 3: Remove the two Torx head screws that hold the frame section 
and remove the frame section. 

I I Step 4: Remove connectors J10 on the A26 M/F Acquisition Intercon- 
nect board and J34 on the A19 Strobe/TDR Buffer board. Note the 
position of the connector’s index triangles to ensure that the multi-pin 
connectors can be correctly replaced. 

I I Step 5: Remove connectors J29A, J30A, J32, J33A, and J33B on the 
A19 Strobe/TDR Buffer board. 

r~l Step 6: Grab between the two sampling head slots and gently pull out 
the Acquisition unit a few inches. 

I I Step 7: Remove the gray ground wire from the rear of the Acquisition 
unit. 

I I Step 8: Remove the Acquisition unit. 




To prevent damage to interconnecting wires, be carefui not to pinch 
any interconnecting wires when repiacing this unit. 



To replace the Acquisition unit, perform the previous steps in the reverse 
order. 



6-26 



Maintenance 







Corrective Maintenance 



Battery Disposal and 
First Aid 



The instrument contains the following number of batteries on the following 
boards: 

■ two batteries (in the U500 and U51 1 RAM sockets) on the A5 Time 
Base/Controller board 

■ one battery (BT 1 30) on the A1 4 I/O board 

■ one battery (BT 1 50) on the A1 8 Memory board 

See Figures 6-10, 6-19, and 6-22 respectively, for the location of these 
batteries. 



WARNING 



To avoid personal injury, observe proper procedures for the han- 
dling of lithium batteries. Improper handling may cause fire, 
explosion, or severe burns. Do not recharge, crush, disassemble, 
heat the battery above 100° C (212° F), incinerate, or expose the 
contents to water. 



Battery Disposal 

Dispose of the batteries according to local, state and federal regulations. 

NOTE 



Typically, small quantities (less than 20) can be safely disposed of 
with ordinary garbage in a sanitary landfill. 

Larger quantities must be sent by surface transport to a hazardous 
waste disposal facility. The batteries should be individually pack- 
aged to prevent shorting. Then, pack them into a sturdy container 
that is clearly labeled, Lithium Batteries — DO NOT OPEN. 



11801C Service Manual 



6-27 






Corrective Maintenance 



Emergency and First Aid Information 

In case of accidental contact with the lithium batteries, give your emergency 

care provider the following information: 

■ Manufacturer: Panasonic 

■ Battery Type: Lithium Poly-Carbon monoflouride, BR 2/3 A 

■ Solvent (electrolyte): Gama Butyriactone is of low toxicity. It can cause 
some eye and respiratory irritation. According to the manufacturer, the 
solvent may be released during venting. (Venting is an out gassing of 
battery material.) This is usually caused by short circuiting (for more 
than a few seconds) or by overheating. 

■ Solute: LIBF4 

Table 6-3 lists the emergency procedures to follow should you come in 

contact with battery solvent. 



Table 6-3: 


Emergency Procedures for Contact with Battery Solvent 


Contact 


Do This: 


Skin 


Wash promptly with plenty of water. 


Eyes 


Flush immediately with plenty of water and use an emer- 
gency eye wash, if available. Report to a medical profes- 
sional for treatment. 


Inhalation 


Leave the area and get fresh air. Report to a medical 
professional for treatment. 


Ingestion 


Non-toxic according to laboratory testing. However, re- 
port to a medical professional for advice. 



In case of venting, clear the immediate area. Venting will usually last only 
a few seconds. 



6-28 



Maintenance 




Corrective Maintenance 



FRU Board and 
Assembly Removal 



Pin connectors are for electrical interconnection with chassis-mounted 
components and other boards. Most boards/assemblies in the instrument 
are mounted on the chassis. The following four boards plug onto the top of 
the A13 Mother board (see Figure 6-7 for the location of these boards in the 
card cage): 

■ A1 4 Input/Output (I/O) 

■ A1 5 Memory Management Unit (MMU) 

■ A1 7 Executive Processor (EXP) 

■ A1 8 Memory 

The following two boards plug onto the A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect 
board (See Figure 6-1 for the locations of these boards in the Acquisition 
unit): 

■ A24/A27 Acquisition Analog 

■ A25/A28 Acquisition MPU 

Feed-through connectors join the plug-on boards to the A13 Mother board 
and the A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect board. 




To minimize the chance of static charge damage to the integrated 
circuits and/or related circuitry, after removing a board from the 
instrument, place it on a grounded, antistatic surface. 

Some components that are mounted on a board must be retained 
for use with the new assembly. These components would include 
interconnecting plugs, support posts, and some wiring. 



11 801 C Service Manual 



6-29 






Corrective Maintenance 



A15 

Memory Management Plastic Board 

Unit (MMU) Guides 



/ \ 










i i 


Rear Panel 


A18 


A14 


A17 




Memory 


Input/Output 


Executive Processor 






WO) 


(EXP) 






Rear of Oscilloscope 



Figure 6-7: Top View of the Card Cage 



6-30 



Maintenance 













Corrective Maintenance 



A1 M/F Strobe Drive Board 

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6-8 and 6-32 

for connector, screw, and index locations. 

I I Step1: Place the instrument in the inverted position and remove the 
bottom panel. 

r~l Step 2: Remove connectors J1 6, J27, J28, J33A, J33B, J35, J36, J37, 
J38, and J39 from the A1 M/F Strobe Drive board. Then remove connec- 
tors J10, J18, and J34 from the A1 M/F Strobe Drive board. Note the 
position of connectors from the A1 M/F Strobe Drive board index triangle 
to ensure that the connectors can be correctly replaced. 

NOTE 

Record the positions of the connectors to ensure that the connec- 
tors can be correctly replaced. 

I I Step 3: Remove the five Torx head screws and carefully lift the board, 
unplugging it from the J19 connector on the A1 M/F Strobe Drive board. 

To replace the A1 M/F Strobe Drive board, perform the previous steps in 

reverse order. 



Torx Head 




Figure 6-8: Removing/Replacing the A1 M/F Strobe Drive Board 



11801C Service Manual 



6-31 






Corrective Maintenance 



A3 M/F Power Connect Board 

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6-2, 6-3, 6-9, 
and 6-19 for connector, screw, and index locations. 

I I Stepi: Remove the Power Supply module as described earlier in this 
section. 



NOTE 



The chasis ground wire (green-yellow) wire may be removed from 
the Power Supply module for this operation only. 

Record the positions of all connectors to ensure that the connec- 
tors can be correctly replaced. 



I I Step 2: Remove the A1 M/F Strobe Drive board. 

I I Step 3: Remove the A5 Time Base/Controller board. 

I I Step 4: Remove the A4 Regulator board. 

I I steps: Remove J90 from the A1 4 Input/Output board. 

To replace the A3 M/F Power Connect board, perform the previous steps in 
reverse order. 



WARNING 



To prevent electric shock or damage to the instrument, check that 
the chassis ground wire is replaced on the Power Supply module. 



6-32 



Maintenance 







11 801 C Service Manual 



6-33 




Corrective Maintenance 



A4 Regulator Board 

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6-2, 6-3, 6-9, 
and 6-32 procedures for removal for connector, screw, and index locations. 

r~l Step 1 : Remove the Power Supply module. (See the Power Supply 
Module Removal procedure in this section.) 

I I Step 2: Set the instrument upright position (if not already in this posi- 
tion). 

I I Step 3: Remove connectors J57 and J60 from the A4 Regulator board. 
Note the position of the multi-pin connector’s index triangles to ensure 
that the connectors can be correctly replaced. 

I I Step 4: Remove the two Torx head screws from the metal heat sink 
attached to the rear of this board. 

NOTE 

Now, the A4 Regulator board is not attached to the chassis. Howev- 
er, it remains connected to the A3 M/F Power Connect board 
through interconnecting pins. 

r~l Step 5: Carefully unplug the J95 and J96 pins from the A4 Regulator 
board by pulling the A4 Regulator board toward the rear. 

I I Step 6: Remove the A4 Regulator board. 

To replace the A4 Regulator board, perform the previous steps in reverse 
order. 



NOTE 



Match the index triangle on the multi-pin connectors with the corre- 
sponding square pad on the circuit board. 



6-34 



Maintenance 





Corrective Maintenance 



A5 Time Base/Controller Board 
A6 Calibrator Board 

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6-10 and 6-32 

for connector, screw, and index locations. 

I I Step 1 : Place the instrument in the inverted position. 

I I Step 2: To remove the A6 Calibrator Board, remove connectors J1 and 
J17 from the A6 Calibrator Board. Remove the Torx head screw securing 
the board in place. Lift the board from J91 on the A5 Time Base/Control- 
ler Board. Perform this process in reverse to replace the Calibrator 
Board. 

I I Step 3: To remove the A5 Time Base/Controller Board, remove connec- 
tors J16, J29A, J30A, J32, J35, J91 , Ext Att, and Presc from the A5 Time 
Base/Controller board. Use exteme care to prevent damage to the cable 
center connector that was attached to Presc. Then, remove connectors 
J18 and J83 from the A5 Time Base/Controller board. Note the position 
of the multi-pin connector’s index triangles to ensure that the connectors 
can be correctly replaced. 

NOTE 

Record the positions of the connectors and the receptacles to 
ensure that these connectors and receptacles will be positioned 
correctly when reinstalled. 

I I Step 4: Remove the six Torx head screws holding the board in place. 

I I Step 5: Remove the A5 Time Base/Controller board. 

To replace the board, perform the previous steps in reverse order. 



11801C Service Manual 



6-35 





Corrective Maintenance 




J32 

Ton Head 
Screw (2) 



J30A 



J29A 

J860 



Ton Head 
Screw (2) 



Figure 6-10: Removing/Replacing the A5 Time Base/Controlier Board and A6 Calibrator Board 



6-36 



Maintenance 







Corrective Maintenance 



A7 CRT Socket Board and A8 CRT Driver Board 

See Figures 6-1 , 6-4, 6-5, 6-7, 6-1 1,6-12, 6-1 3, 6-1 5, and 6-32 for board, 
connector, screw, and index locations. 

Remove and replace the A7 CRT Socket board and the A8 CRT Driver board 
as follows: 

I I Step 1 : Remove the three Torx head screws that secure the CRT cover, 
and then remove the CRT cover. 

I I Step 2: Remove the two plastic circuit board guides on top of the card 
cage. 

□ Step 3: Remove the two Torx head screws that secure the A7 CRT 
Socket board cover, and then remove the A7 CRT Socket board cover. 

□ Step 4: Slowly pull the A7 CRT Socket board toward the rear of the 
instrument to unplug the A7 CRT Socket board from the CRT. 

I I Step 5: Remove connectors J53 and J56 on the A7 CRT Socket board. 
Note the positions of the multi-pin connector’s index triangles to ensure 
that you can correctly replace these connectors. 

^ARNIN^ 

The CRT anode voltage is 16 kV. To avoid electric shock, ground 
the anode lead from the CRT to the chassis to short any stored 
charge remaining in the CRT. Wait approximately ten minutes, then 
ground the anode lead to the chassis again (refer to Step 6). 

r~l Step 6: Use a non-conducting tool to pry up the anode lead cap. This 
rubber cap is located on the upper part of the CRT, behind the front 
casting. Using a non-conducting tool, release the spring clip inside the 
cap and remove the anode. Insert one blade of a pair of needle-nose 
pliers against the anode, and touch the other blade to the top of the 
front casting to ground the anode to the chassis. 

I I Step 7: Remove the single Torx head screw that secures the A8 CRT 
Driver board to the instrument chassis. Use either of the following meth- 
ods to remove the Torx head screw: 

■ Remove the Torx head screw with a very short handled T-1 5 Torx 
head screwdriver. Ensure that you do not strike the CRT while 
removing the screw. 

■ Remove the A1 0 Front Panel Control board. Then, use a Torx head 
screwdriver that has an extension length inserted in it to remove the 
Torx head screw. Access the screw from the hole in the left side of 
the instrument chassis. Ensure that you do not strike the CRT while 
removing the screw. 



11801C Service Manual 



6-37 






Corrective Maintenance 



I I Step 8: Remove the single Torx head screw that secures the transform- 
er on the A8 CRT Driver board to the instrument chasis. This screw is 
located at the rear of the transformer. The A8 CRT Driver board is now 
not attached to the instrument chassis. 

I I Step 9: Remove connectors J52, J56, and J57 from the A8 CRT Driver 
board. Note the position of the multi-pin connector’s index triangles to 
ensure that you can correctly replace these connectors. 

I I Step 10: Lift the A8 CRT Driver board partially out of the instrument 
chassis. 

I I Step 1 1 : Remove connectors J54 and J55 from the A8 CRT Driver 
board. Note the position of the multi-pin connector’s index triangles to 
ensure that you can correctly replace these connectors. 

I I Step 12: Remove the A8 CRT Driver board and the A7 CRT Socket 
board. 

I I Step 1 3: Unsolder the two wires that connect the A8 CRT Driver board 
to the A7 CRT Socket board (the two boards are now separated). 

To replace the A8 CRT Driver board and the A7 CRT Socket board, perform 

the previous steps in reverse order. 




Solder Points 



J56 



J53 



Figure 6-1 1 : Removing/Replacing the A7 CRT Socket Board 



6-38 



Maintenance 





Corrective Maintenance 




11801C Service Manual 



6-39 








Corrective Maintenance 



A9 Touch Panel Assembly 

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6-5, 6-15, and 
6-32 for connector, screw, and index locations. 

Remove and replace the A9 Touch Panel assembly as follows: 

□ Step 1 : Set the instrument on its right side. (The CRT will now be at the 
top.) 

□ Step 2: Use a 1/1 6-inch Allen wrench to loosen the small Allen screws 
in each of the two control knobs. 

I I Step 3: Slowly remove the two control knobs so that you do not lose 
the small Allen screws inside the knobs. 

I I Step 4: Remove the two Torx head screws at the bottom of the A9 
Touch Panel Assembly. 

I I Step 5: Lift up on the bottom of the A9 Touch Panel Assembly and 
swing the assembly outward. 

NOTE 

The top of the A9 Front Panel Assembly Is held by two tabs. These 
tabs fit Into two slots in the front-panel chassis. 

I I Step 6: Remove the black ground wire from the quick-disconnect 
ground connector on the front panel casting. 

I I Step 7: Remove connector J73 from the A10 Front Panel Control board. 
Note the position of multi-pin connector’s index triangles to ensure that 
you can correctly replace this connector. Carefully remove the wire cable 
through the slot provided in the front casting. 

Cover the A9 Touch Panel Assembly with protective material once it is 
removed since the plastic exterior may scratch. 

To replace the A9 Touch Panel Assembly board, perform the previous steps 
using the reverse process. 



NOTE 



Feed any slack cable from connector J73 to inside the chassis 
(near the A10 Front Panel Control board). Be careful to not pinch 
the interconnecting cable while replacing the front panel bezel. 



6-40 



Maintenance 





Corrective Maintenance 



A9 Touch Panel 




Figure 6-13: A9 Touch Panel Assembly Torx Head Screws 



1 ' 






1 




— 1 



J73 

Connector 



Figure 6-14: Removing/Replacing the A9 Touch Panel Assembly 



11801C Service Manual 



6-41 






Corrective Maintenance 



A10 Front Panel Control Board 

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6-5, 6-1 1 , 

6-15, and 6-32 for connector, screw, and index locations. 

I I Step 1 : Remove the CRT shield. (Refer to the Cathode Ray Tube Re- 
moval procedure in this section, starting at Step 3.) 

I I Step 2: Remove connectors J72, J73, J74, and J75 from the A1 0 Front 
Panel Button board. Note the position of the multi-pin connector’s index 
triangles to ensure that the connectors can be correctly replaced. 

I I Step 3: Remove the two Torx head screws at the upper edge of the 
board. 

I I Step 4: Lift the board away from the guides at its bottom and remove it. 

To replace the A10 Front Panel Control board, perform the previous steps in 

reverse order. 



6-42 



Maintenance 





Corrective Maintenance 



A1 1 Front Panel Button Board 

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6-5, 6-1 1 , 

6-15, 6-16, and 6-32 for connector, screw, and index locations. 

I I Step 1 : Remove the CRT shield. (Refer to the removal instructions in the 
Cathode Ray Tube Removal/Replacement procedure earlier in this 
section, starting at Step 3.) 

□ Step 2: Remove connector J75 from the A10 Front Panel Control board. 
Note the position of connector index triangles for correct replacement. 

I I Step 3: Remove the two Torx head screws from the A1 1 Front Panel 
Button board, which is located at the top and near the inside center of 
the front casting. 

□ Step 4: Remove the All Front Panel Button board. 

To replace the A1 1 Front Panel Button board, perform the previous steps in 

reverse order. 



Torx Head Screws (2) 




Figure 6-16: Removing/Replacing the All Front Panel Button Board 



6-44 



Maintenance 






Corrective Maintenance 



A12 Rear Panel Assembly 

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6-2, 6-17, and 
6-32 for connector, screw, and index locations. 

I I Step 1 : Remove the connectors from the RS-232-C, the GRIB, and the 
PRINTER connector holders. 

I I Step 2: Remove the eight Torx head screws from the outer edges of the 
rear panel connector plate. 

I I Step 3: Tilt the plate back from the instrument. Remove connector J78 
from the top of the A1 2 Rear Panel assembly. Remove the grounding 
wire. Note the position of the connector’s index triangles to ensure that 
the connectors can be correctly replaced. 

□ Step 4: Remove the rear panel connector plate and the attached A1 2 
Rear Panel Assembly. 

□ Step 5: Remove the following items from the rear panel plate: 

■ two bail brackets, screws, and washers from the PRINTER connec- 
tor 

■ two posts from the GPIB connector 

■ posts, lockwashers, and flat washers from the RS-232-C connec- 
tor(s) 

■ Torx head screw and washer (at lower left, if present) 

□ Step 6: Remove the A1 2 Rear Panel Assembly from the rear panel 
connector plate. 




The metal covers on the PRINTER and on the GPIB connectors are 
loose. If the board Is inverted, these covers will fall off. 



To replace the A12 Rear Panel assembly, perform the previous steps in 
reverse order. 



NOTE 



Replacement of connector J78 will be simplified if you replace the 
connector before reinstalling the rear panel connector plate on the 
rear of the chassis. 



11801C Service Manual 



6-45 






Corrective Maintenance 



A13 Mother Board 

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6-7, 6-18, and 
6-32 for connector, screw, and index locations. 

I I Step 1 : Remove the three Torx head screws that secure the CRT cover, 
and then remove the CRT cover. Remove the card cage retainer from 
the top front of the card cage by removing the card cage’s two screws. 
Remove both circuit board guides from the top of the card cage. The 
other ends of the guides contain slots which attach to the edge of a 
metal bracket. Both ends of the guides can be pried loose. 

I I Step 2: Remove the A14 I/O, A15 MMU, A17 Executive Processor, and 
A18 Memory boards. Note the position of the multi-pin connector’s index 
triangles to ensure that the connectors can be correctly replaced. 

NOTE 

Tag the interconnecting plugs and mark the board locations to 
ensure that the plugs can be correctly replaced as well. 

I I Step 3: Remove connector J63A from the A1 3 Mother board. 

□ Step 4: Remove the six Torx head screws. 

I I Step 5: Remove the A13 Mother board. 

To replace the A13 Mother board perform, perform the previous steps in 
reverse order. 




To prevent damage to the interconnecting wires, be careful not to 
pinch the wires along the inside edge while replacing this board. 



11801C Service Manual 



6-47 






Corrective Maintenance 




Figure 6-18: Removing/Replacing the A13 Mother Board 



6-48 



Maintenance 






Corrective Maintenance 



A14 Input/Output (I/O) Board 

See Figures 6-4, 6-7, 6-19, and 6-32 for board, connector, screw, and index 

locations. 

Remove and replace the A14 I/O board as follows: 

I I Step 1 : Remove the three Torx head screws that secure the CRT cover, 
and then remove the CRT cover. 

□ Step 2: Remove both of the plastic board guides from the top of the 
card cage. These guides are retained by two small catches located in 
two holes in the left bracket of the card cage. The other ends of the 
guides contain slots which attach to the edge of a metal bracket. Both 
ends of the guides can be pried loose. 

I I Step 3: Remove connectors J72, J77, J78, and J90 from the A1 4 I/C 
board. Note the position of multi-pin connector’s index triangles to 
ensure that you can be correctly replace these connectors. 

I I Step 4: Lift the white, hinged tab at the upper, front edge of the board. 
Pull the tab upward until the A14 I/C board separates from the A13 
Mother board. 

I I Step 5: Remove the A1 4 I/C board. 

To replace the A14 I/C board, perform the previous steps in reverse order. 

NOTE 



Insert the board edges into the plastic guides at each end of the 
card cage. Lower the board into position. 

Ensure that connector P105 is seated on the A1 3 Mother board 
connector. Push down firmly on the A1 4 I/O board to seat this 
connector on the A1 3 Mother board. 



WARNING 



A lithium battery (BT130) is mounted on theA14 I/O board. Be 
careful when placing the A1 4 I/O board on metal surfaces. If some 
1C or battery leads are shorted, the battery may discharge or over- 
heat and vent. (You can use plastic standoffs to prevent short 
circuits.) This battery requires speciai handiing for disposal. 
Refer to the instructions on Lithium Battery Disposal and First Aid 
earlier in this section. 



11 801 C Service Manual 



6-49 






Corrective Maintenance 



J78 



J77 J90 



J72 




Lithium Battery (to A1 3 Mother Board 

(BT130) Connector) 



Figure 6-19: Removing/Replacing the A14 I/O Board 



6-50 



Maintenance 






Corrective Maintenance 



A15 Memory Management Unit (MMU) Board 

See Figures 6-4, 6-7, 6-20, and 6-32 for board, connector, screw, and index 

locations. 

Remove and replace the At 5 MMU board as follows: 

I I Step 1 : Remove the three Torx head screws that secure the CRT cover, 
and then remove the CRT cover. 

□ Step 2: Remove both of the plastic board guides from the top of the 
card cage. The guides are retained by two small catches located in two 
holes in the left bracket of the card cage. The other ends of the guides 
contain slots which attach to the edge of a metal bracket. Both ends of 
the guides can be pried loose. 

I I Step 3: Remove connectors J52, J53, J57, and J83 from the At 5 MMU 
board. Note the position of the multi-pin connector’s index triangles to 
ensure that you can correctly replace these connectors. 

I I Step 4: Lift the white, hinged tabs at the front and rear edges of the At 5 
MMU board. Pull the tabs upward until the At 5 MMU board separates 
from the At 3 Mother board. 

r~| Step 5: Remove the At 5 MMU board. 

To replace the A15 MMU board, perform the previous steps in the reverse 

order. 



NOTE 



Insert the board edges into the plastic guides at each end of the 
card cage. Lower the board into position. 

Ensure that connector P101 is seated onto the A1 3 Mother board 
connector. Push down firmly on the A1 5 MMU board to seat this 
connector on the A1 3 Mother board. 



11 801 C Service Manual 



6-5t 





Corrective Maintenance 



J83 J53 J57 J52 




(To A13 Mother Board 
Connector) 



Figure 6-20: Removing/Replacing the A15 MMU Board 



6-52 



Maintenance 





Corrective Maintenance 



A1 7 Executive Processor (EXP) Board 

See Figures 6-4, 6-7, 6-21 , and 6-32 for board, connector, screw, and index 

locations. 

Remove and replace the A17 Executive Processor board as follows: 

I I Step 1 : Remove the three Torx head screws that secure the CRT cover, 
and then remove the CRT cover. 

□ Step 2: Remove both of the plastic board guides from the top of the 
card cage. The guides are retained by two small catches located in two 
holes in the left bracket of the card cage. The other ends of the guides 
contain slots which attach to the edge of a metal bracket. Both ends of 
the guides can be pried loose. 

I I Step 3: Remove connector J77 from the A1 7 Executive Processor 
board. Note the position of the multi-pin connector’s index triangle to 
ensure that you can correctly replace this connector. 

I I Step 4: Lift the white, hinged tabs at the front and rear edges of the 
board. Pull the tabs upward until the A17 Executive Processor board 
separates from the A13 Mother board. 

I I Step 5: Remove the A1 7 Executive Processor board. 

To replace the A17 Executive Processor board, perform the previous steps in 

reverse order. 



NOTE 



Insert the board edges into the plastic guides at each end of the 
card cage. Lower the board into position. 

Ensure that connector P104 on the A17 Executive Processor board 
is seated onto the of A1 3 Mother board connector. Push down 
firmly on the A1 7 Executive Processor board to seat this connector 
on the A1 3 Mother board. 



11 801 C Service Manual 



6-53 





Corrective Maintenance 



A18 Memory Board 

See Figures 6-4, 6-7, 6-21 , 6-22, and 6-32 for board, connector, screw, and 

index locations. 

Remove and replace the A18 Memory board as follows: 

I I Step 1 : Remove the three Torx head screws that secure the CRT cover, 
and then remove the CRT cover. 

□ Step 2: Remove both of the plastic board guides from the top of the 
card cage. The guides are retained by two small catches located in two 
holes in the left bracket of the card cage. The other ends of the guides 
contain slots which attach to the edge of a metal bracket. Both ends of 
the guides can be pried loose. 

I I Step 3: Remove connector J77 from the A1 7 Executive Processor 
board. Note the position of the multi-pin connector’s index triangle to 
ensure that you can correctly replace this connectors. 

I I Step 4: Lift the white, hinged tabs at the front and rear edges of the 
board. Pull the tabs upward until the A18 Memory board separates from 
the A13 Mother board. 

I I Step 5: Remove the A1 8 Memory board. 

To replace the A18 Memory board, perform the previous steps in reverse 

order. 



NOTE 



Insert the edges of the board into the plastic guides at each end of 
the card cage. Lower the board into position. 

Ensure that connector P106 is seated onto the A1 3 Mother board 
connector. Push down firmly on the A1 8 Memory board to seat this 
connector on the A1 3 Mother board. 



WARNING 



A lithium battery (BT130) is mounted on the A1 8 Memory board. Be 
careful when placing the A1 8 Memory board on metal surfaces. If 
some 1C or battery leads are shorted, the battery may discharge or 
overheat and vent. (You can use plastic standoffs to prevent short 
circuits.) This battery requires speciai handiing for disposal. 
Refer to the instructions on Lithium Battery Disposal and First Aid 
earlier in this section. 



11801C Service Manual 



6-55 






Corrective Maintenance 



A19 Strobe/TDR Buffer Board 

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6-23, 6-26, 
and 6-32 for connector, screw, and index locations. 

I I Step 1 : Remove the Acquisition unit and position the Acquisition unit in 
the upright position. 

I I Step 2: Remove the two Torx head screws on each black retaining 
brace located at the top of the Acquisition unit to remove these braces. 

r~| Step 3: Remove connectors J1 A, J2A, J3A, J4A, JIB, J2B, J3B, J4B, 

J1 C, J2C, J3C, J4C, J29A, J30A, J32, J33A, J33B, and J34 from the A1 9 
Strobe/TDR Buffer board. 

NOTE 

Record the positions of the connectors and the receptacles to 
ensure that the connectors can be correctly replaced. 

I I Step 4: Remove J1 0 from the A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect board. 

□ Step 5: Remove the two Torx head screws on the bottom of the A1 9 
Strobe/TDR Buffer board, and gently pull out the board. 

To replace the At 9 Strobe/TDR board, perform the previous steps in reverse 
order. 



11801C Service Manual 



6-57 





Corrective Maintenance 



J2A J1A J32 J4A J3A J1C J2C J3C J4C J33A J33B 




Figure 6-23; Removing/Replacing the A19 Strobe/TDR Buffer Board 



6-58 



Maintenance 





Corrective Maintenance 



A20-A23 Head Interconnect Boards 

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6-23, 6-24, 

6-25, 6-26, 6-28, 6-29, and 6-32 for connector and screw locations. 

I I Step 1 : Remove the Acquisition unit and place the Acquisition unit in 
the upright position. 

I I Step 2: Remove the two Torx head screws on each black retaining 
brace located at the top of the Acquisition unit. 

I I Step 3: Remove the A24/A27 Acquisition Analog boards, the A25/A28 
Acquisition MPU boards, and the A19 Strobe/TDR Buffer board. 

I I Step 4: Remove the four screws holding the top of the front subpanel of 
the Acquisition unit. 

I I Step 5: Remove the four screws on the gold-colored locking bar lo- 
cated on the top front of the Acquisition unit. 

I I Step 6: Turn the Acquisition unit in the inverted position and repeat 
Steps 4 and 5 on the bottom of the Acquisition unit. 

I I Step 7: Remove the connectors from the A26 M/F Acquisition Intercon- 
nect board connector. Note the position of the multi-pin connector’s 
index triangle to ensure that the connector can be correctly replaced. 

I I Step 8: Remove the Front Subpanel assembly with the A20-A23 Head 
Interconnect boards intact. 

I I Step 9: Remove the bottom Torx head screw from within the sampling 
head compartment that contains the head interconnect board you are 
removing. 

I I Step 10; Turn the Front Subpanel assembly around so that the open 
compartments face away from you. 

I I Step 11: Remove the top nut that fastens the sampling head compart- 
ment to the head interconnect board you are removing. 

J1I2I3I4 



Figure 6-24: Removing/Replacing the A20-A23 Head Interconnect Boards 



11801C Service Manual 



6-59 







Corrective Maintenance 



Front View of Front Subpanel Assembly 



Sampling Head 
Compartments 




Torx Head Screws 



Torn Head Screws 



Rear View of Front Subpanel Assembly 



A20-A23 Head 
Interconnect 
Boards 



A20- A23 Head Interconnect A20- A23 Head Interconnect 



Board Retaining Nuts Board Retaining Nuts (Power Only) 




Figure 6-25: Removing/Replacing the Front Subpanel Assembly 



I I Step 12: Remove the head interconnect board by slightly prying up on 
the tabs that are keeping it in place, and slowly remove the board(s) 
from the J1/2/3/4 connector. 

To replace the A20-A23 Head Interconnect boards, perform the previous 
steps in reverse order. 



6-60 



Maintenance 






Corrective Maintenance 



A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect Board 

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6-23, 6-25, 

6-26, 6-27, 6-28, 6-29, and 6-32 for connector, screw, and index locations. 

I I Step 1 : Remove the Acquisition unit as and place the Acquisition unit in 
the upright position. 

I I Step 2: Remove the A24/A27 Acquisition Analog board, the A25/A28 
Acquisition MPU board and the A19 Strobe/TDR Buffer board. 

I I Step 3: Remove the four screws on the gold colored retaining brace 
holding the top of the Front Subpanel assembly of the Acquisition unit. 

I I Step 4: Remove the four screws on the gold colored locking bar located 
on the top front of the Acquisition unit. 

I I Step 5: Turn the Acquisition unit in the inverted position and repeat 
Steps 3 and 4 on the bottom of the Acquisition unit. 

r~| Step 6: Remove connectors J1 1 , J1 2, J1 3, and J1 4 on the A26 M/F 
Acquisition Interconnect board. Note the position of the multi-pin con- 
nector’s index triangle to ensure that the connector can be correctly 
replaced. 




Figure 6-26: Removing/Replacing the A26 M/F Acquisition interconnect Board 



11801C Service Manual 



6-61 






Corrective Maintenance 



I I Step 7: Remove the Front Subpanel assembly with the head intercon- 
nect boards intact. 

I I Step 8: Remove the six Torx head screws to remove the A26 M/F Ac- 
quisition Interconnect board. 

To replace the A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect board, perform the previous 
steps in reverse order. 



Acquisition 
Unit Chassis 



A26 M/F 
Acquisition 
Interconnect 
Board 




Torx Head Screws (6) 



Figure 6-27: Top View of the A26 Mainframe Acquisition interconnect Board 



6-62 



Maintenance 






Corrective Maintenance 



A24/A27 Acquisition Anaiog Boards 

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6-23, 6-26, 

6-28, and 6-32 for board guide, screw, and index locations. 

I I Step 1 : Remove the Acquisition unit and place the Acquisition unit in 
the upright position. 

I I Step 2: Remove the two Torx head screws on each black retaining 
brace located at the top of the Acquisition unit; remove these braces. 

I I Step 3: Remove connectors J41 , J42, J43, and J44 from the A24/A27 
Acquisition Analog board. 

I I Step 4: Pull up on the hinged white tabs until the board separates from 
connector P6. 

To replace the A24/A27 Acquisition Analog board, perform the previous 

steps in reverse order. 



NOTE 



Insert the edges of the board into the plastic guides. Lower the 
board into position. 

Check that connector is seated onto the A26 M/F Acquisition Inter- 
connect board connector. Push down firmly on the A24IA27 Ac- 
quisition Analog board to seat this connector on the A26 MjF 
Acquisition Interconnect board. 



J41 J42 J43 J44 




Figure 6-28: Removing/Replacing the A24/A27 Acquisition Analog Boards 



11801C Service Manual 



6-63 





Corrective Maintenance 



A25/A28 Acquisition MPU Boards 

Removal and replacement steps are listed below. See Figures 6-23, 6-26, 
6-29, and 6-32 for board guide, screw, and index locations. 

I I Step 1 : Remove the Acquisition unit and place it in the upright position. 

I I Step 2: Remove the two Torx head screws on each black retaining 
brace located at the top of the Acquisition unit; remove these braces. 

I I Step 3: Pull up on the hinged white tabs until the board separates from 
connector P8 on the A26 M/F Acquisition Interconnect board. 

To replace the A25/A28 Acquisition MPU board, perform the previous steps 
in reverse order. 



NOTE 



Insert the edges of the board into the plastic guides. Lower the 
board into position. 

Check that the connector is seated onto the A26 M/F Acquisition 
Interconnect board connector. Push down firmly on the A25/A28 
Acquisition MPU board to seat this connector on the A26 M/F 
Acquisition Interconnect board. 



✓ 



P7/8 (to A26 M/F Acquisition 
interconnect Board Connector) 



Figure 6-29: Removing/Replacing the A25/A28 Acquisition MPU Boards 



6-64 



Maintenance 





Corrective Maintenance 



FRU 1C Removal 



The procedures for removing and replacing the FRU ICs in the oscilloscope 
are outlined in this section. 

Serial Data Interface Integrated Circuits (“Slam-Pack” ICs) 

U330 is mounted on the At 4 I/O board. See Figure 6-30 for the location of 
this 1C. It has a raised, ridged, heat sink cover. The 1C is oriented to its 
socket by a beveled corner. The other corners are notched to fit the edges 
of the socket. The beveled corner aligns with a spring (small metal tab) at 
one corner of the socket. An example of the 1C is shown in Figure 6-32. 

To remove the Serial Data Interface 1C, proceed as follows: 

I I Step 1 : Remove the At 4 I/C board. 

I I Step 2: Hold the heat sink cover in place and unfasten the retaining clip 
by moving the retaining clip across the tabs while pushing down slightly 
on the cover. 

I CAUTION I 



To prevent static damage to the instrument or components, observe 
ali the special precautions mentioned under Static-Sensitive Classi- 
fication in this section. 

I I Step 3: Remove the cover slowly to prevent the IC from falling out. Note 
the position of the index of the IC for later use before removing the IC. 

I I Step 4: Remove the IC with tweezers. 




Finger oils can degrade reliability of components. Avoid touching 
the IC or its socket contacts with your fingers. 



11801C Service Manual 



6-65 







Corrective Maintenance 



Replace the Serial Data Interface 1C as follows: 

I I Step 1 : Using tweezers, place the beveled corner of the replacement IC 
against the index spring (the original positioning of this index was noted 
earlier). 




Do not damage the spring by improperly seating the beveled 
corner because shorting of the two corner contacts could result. 



□ Step 2: Arrange the other corners with the tweezers to fit evenly at the 
edges of the socket. 

□ Step 3: Set the cover flat on the IC with the cover’s end tabs properly 
aligned with, but not in, the mating recesses in the socket. 

□ Step 4: Push down on the cover, keeping it flat on the IC. Slide the 
cover end tabs into place. Hold it there while moving the retaining clip 
over the tabs at the other end of the cover. 

□ Step 5: Slightly pull on the cover to check that the cover is secure. 

r~l Step 6: Replace the A14 I/O board. 



6-66 



Maintenance 





Time Base Processor Firmware 

U310 U300 U400 U410 




A5-Time Base/Controller 



Dispiay Processor 
Firmware 

U140 U150 




A1 5-Memory Management Unit 




Figure 6-: 



11 801 C Service Manual 



Corrective Maintenance 



Seriai Data 
interiace iC 

U330 




A1 4 -Input/Output (I/O) 




A1 8-Memory 



Acquisition Processor 
Firmware 

U611 



tion MPU 




6-67 






Corrective Maintenance 



Firmware Integrated Circuits (“Dual In-Line Package” ICs) 

The firmware ICs are located on five separate boards (see Figure 6-30 for 
the 1C locations on each circuit board). The boards and their respective 
firmware (FW) are: 

■ A5 Time Base/Controller board — Time Base Processor FW (U300, 
U310, U400 and U410) 

■ A15 MMU board — Display Processor FW (U140 and U150) 

■ A18 Memory board — Main Processor FW (U800, U810, U820, U830, 
U900, U910, U920 and U930) 

■ A25 and A28 Acquisition MPU boards — Acquisition Processor FW 
(U611) 

All of the ICs listed above are ordered by a single Tektronix part number, as 
a single firmware kit. (Each iC cannot be ordered separately.) For the 
1 1 801 C, the firmware kit number is 020-1 889-XX. 

To remove and replace the firmware ICs in your oscilloscope, follow these 
procedures: 



WARNING 



Dangerous shock hazards may be exposed when the instrument 
covers are removed. Before proceeding, ensure that the oscilio- 
scope PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH is in the OFF position. Then, 
disconnect the instrument from the power source. Disassembiy 
should only be attempted by qualified service personnel. 




To prevent static damage to the instrument, observe alt the special 
precautions mentioned under Static-Sensitive Ciassification in this 
section. 



6-68 



Maintenance 







Corrective Maintenance 



Firmware Upgrade Procedure 

To upgrade or replace your firmware ICs, complete the following steps: 

I I Step 1 : Prepare the instrument for the firmware upgrade procedure as 

follows: 

■ Set the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH to OFF, and remove the power 
cord. 

■ Place the instrument on its right side (if not already in this position) 
to provide access to the boards upgraded in the firmware upgrade 
procedure that follows. 

I I Step 2: Access boards within the card cage as follows: 

■ Ensure that the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH is set to OFF and the 
power cord is unplugged. 

■ Remove the instrument’s top panel cover. 

■ Remove the two plastic board guides from the top of the card cage 
(at the left rear of the instrument). 

■ Remove the three Torx head screws that secure the CRT cover, and 
then remove the CRT cover (see Figure 6-4). 




Figure 6-31: IC Insertion-Extraction Tool 



11801C Service Manual 



6-69 





Corrective Maintenance 



I I Step 3: Upgrade the A1 5 MMU board firmware as follows: 

■ Remove the A1 5 MMU board from the card cage. The A1 5 MMU 
board is typically located farthest from the outside (left side) of the 
instrument. 

■ Locate the two firmware ICs, U140 and U150. 




To prevent damage to the firmware ICs or the board, ensure pin 1 is 
positioned correctly when replacing components. 



NOTE 



Use the 1C Insertion-Extraction Pliers shown in Figure 6-31 for 
removing and replacing the ICs. (Refer to Table 4-2, Test Equip- 
ment for the part number of these pliers.) 

Do not use the label on the 1C for an index because it may be 
applied incorrectly. See Figure 6-32 for the correct location of the 
index on the 1C. 



■ Remove U140 and replace it with the upgraded IC. The last two-digit 
portion of the part number on the replacement IC should be the 
same as, or higher than, that on the removed IC. Ensure that pin 1 is 
oriented correctly. 

■ Similarly replace U1 50 with the upgraded IC. 

I I Step 4: Upgrade the A1 8 Memory board firmware as follows: 

■ Remove the A1 8 Memory board from the card cage. The A1 8 
Memory board is typically located one slot from the outside (left 
side) of the instrument. 

■ On the A1 8 Memory board, replace the following ICs: 



U800 


U900 


U812 


U910 


U820 


U920 


U830 


U930 



In each case, the last two-digits of the part number on the replace- 
ment IC should be the same as, or higher than, that on the removed 
IC. Again, ensure that pin 1 is oriented correctly. 

■ Return the A1 8 Memory board to its former location in the card 
cage. 



6-70 



Maintenance 






Corrective Maintenance 



I I Step 5: Upgrade the A5 Time Base/Controller board firmware as fol- 
lows: 

■ Locate U300, U31 0, U400, and U41 0 on the A5 Time Base/Controller 
board (see Figure 6-30). These components are found near the 
bottom front of the instrument with the instrument positioned on its 
right side. 

■ Replace U300, U310, U400, and U410 on the A5 Time Base/Control- 
ler board. 

The last two-digit portion of the part number on the replacement IC 
should be the same as, or higher than, that on the removed IC. 
Again, ensure that pin 1 is oriented correctly. 

I I Step 6: Upgrade the A25/A28 Acquisition MPU board firmware as 
follows: 

■ Remove the Acquisition unit from the instrument. 

■ Remove the A25/A28 Acquisition MPU board from the Acquisition 
unit (see Figure 6-1 for the exact location of these boards in the 
Acquisition unit). 

■ Locate U61 1 on the A25/A28 Acquisition MPU board (see Fig- 
ure 6-28). This board is located in the card cage. 

■ Replace U61 1 on the A25/A28 Acquisition MPU board. 

The last two-digit portion of the part number on the replacement IC 
should be the same as, or higher than, that on the removed IC. 
Ensure that pin 1 is oriented correctly. 



11 801 C Service Manual 



6-71 





Corrective Maintenance 



I I Step 7: Verify the instrument serial number as follows: 

■ Locate the manufacturing jumper, J860, on the A5 Time Base/Con- 
troller board (see Figure 6-10), and install the terminal connector 
link. 

■ Connect a power cord to the instrument. 

■ Connect a terminal or controller to the oscilloscope. Refer to the 
11801C User Manual for more information on this connection. 

■ Set the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH and ON/STANDBY switch to 
ON. 

■ Set necessary communication parameters; for example, baud rate. 

■ After the instrument is powered-on, to establish communication from 
the terminal or controller, enter the following commands (<CR> is 
the return key): 

e<CR> 

v<CR> 

■ Verify that the serial number on the instrument’s front panel matches 
the mainframe ID number in the Identify pop-up menu in the UTIL- 
ITY major menu. 

■ If the numbers do not match, then enter the command: 
uid main:”BXXXXXX”<CR> 

where XXXX corresponds to the serial number digits found on the 
front panel serial number marker. 

■ Verify that the proper ID is now displayed in the Identify pop-up 
menu, in the Utility major menu. 

r~| Step 8: Remove the procedure setup as follows: 

■ Set the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH to OFF. 

■ Remove the J860 manufacturing jumper from the A5 Time Base/ 
Controller board. 

■ Replace the bottom instrument cover, and set the instrument up- 
right. 



6-72 



Maintenance 





Corrective Maintenance 



I I Step 9: Perform the final power-on and verification as follows: 

NOTE 



You must now perform the power-on sequence again for the instru- 
ment to recognize the new manufacturing jumper configuration. 



■ Set the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH and ON/STANDBY switch to 
ON. 

■ Verify that the instrument powers-on and successfully completes the 
Self-Test diagnostics. 

NOTE 

If probiems are encountered, then check for the following: 

■ all components are properly oriented in the sockets 

■ all component pins are properly seated 

■ components are installed in the correct location 



11801C Service Manual 



6-73 





Corrective Maintenance 








Slam-Pack 1C 





Note: Match the index triangle on the multi-pin connectors with the 
corresponding square pad on the circuit board. 

Figure 6-32: Multi-Pin Connector Orientation and Semiconductor Indexing Diagram 



6-74 



Maintenance 





Corrective Maintenance 



Cables and 
Connectors 



Cabling diagrams are provided in the Diagrams section to show the inter- 
connecting cables between the various circuit boards, modules, and assem- 
blies. Use these diagrams as a reference when you are removing and/or 
replacing cables between these units. 



Interconnecting Pins 



Two types of connectors are used for these interconnecting pins. If the 
connector is mounted on a plug-on board, a special socket is soldered into 
the board. If the connector is on the end of a lead, an end-lead pin connec- 
tor is used which mates with the interconnecting pin. The following informa- 
tion provides the removal and replacement procedure for the various types 
of interconnecting methods. 

Coaxial-type End-Lead Connectors (Peltolas & SMB) 

These connectors use color coding of wires, which may be helpful to corre- 
late a Peltola connector to its socket on a circuit board. The wire insulation’s 
color, or its colored stripe, is the same as the color represented by the last 
digit of the JXX component number. (EXAMPLE: a green wire would connect 
to a JOS socket.) Other Peltola connectors may have labels which designate 
their JXX component number. 

Multi-Pin Connectors 

These connectors are arranged so that the pin connectors used to connect 
the wires to the interconnecting pins are clamped to the ends of the 
associated leads. 

Some of the pin connectors are grouped together and mounted in a plastic 
holder. The overall result is that these connectors are installed and removed 
as a multi-pin connector. 

Pin 1 on multi-pin connectors is designated with a triangle (or arrowhead). A 
triangle, dot, or square printed on circuit boards denotes pin 1 . When a 
connection is made to a circuit board, the position or orientation of the 



Two methods of interconnection are used to electrically connect circuit 
boards with other boards and components. When the interconnection is 
made with a coaxial cable, a special end-lead connector plugs into a socket 
on the board. Other interconnections are made with a pin soldered into the 
board. 



11801C Service Manual 



6-75 





Corrective Maintenance 



triangle on the multi-pin holder is determined by the index (triangle, dot or 
square) printed on the circuit board. Most board-mounted connectors have 
a square pad for pin 1 . (See Figure 6-32.) 

NOTE 



Match the index triangle on the multi-pin connectors with the corre- 
sponding square pad on the circuit board. 

Some multi-pin connectors are keyed by a gap between the pin 1 
and 3 positions in the holder. (A small plastic plug covers the pin 2 
position on the end of the holder.) There Is a corresponding gap 
between pins 1 and 3 on the circuit board. 

Align the plug in the multi-pin holder with the gap between the 
circuit board pins. The connector is then ready to be installed. 



Many of the larger, multi-pin ribbon connectors have a red, blue, or other 
contrasting color line along one side of their attached wire cables. This line 
indicates the location of pins 1 and 2 and also the location of the corre- 
sponding triangle index mark on the connector. 

Some of the gray-colored ribbon cables may have the number of their 
connectors stamped on them. 

The ribbon connectors have the following two functions: 

■ to provide a strain relief for the wire connections. The wire ribbon is 
wrapped around a bar between the wire connections and the top of the 
connector. Strain is then felt between the wires and the top of the con- 
nector. This relieves most of the strain which would otherwise be felt on 
the wire connections. 

■ to provide a pull-tab to ease disconnection. The pull-tab is attached 
inside the connector. When the tab is pulled, even pressure is applied 
across the connector. The connector then separates easily from its 
holder. 



NOTE 



To remove these ribbon connectors, grasp the pull-tab (fastened 
Into the connector, if there) and pull it loose from the holder. 

If there isn’t a pull-tab present in the connector, grasp the ends of 
the connector instead. Pull It straight out from the connector sock- 
et. 



6-76 



Maintenance 





Corrective Maintenance 



Checks After FRU 
Replacement 



After any FRU has been replaced, that particular unit should be checked. 
Table 6-4 lists the required checks (and the respective procedure name) to 
perform. 



Table 6-4: Checks Required After FRU Replacement 



FRU Replacement 


Checks Required 


A1 Strobe Drive Board 


Power-On Diagnostics 
Extended Diagnostics 
Internal Clock 


A3 M/F Power Connect 
Board 


Power-On Diagnostics 
Extended Diagnostics 


A4 Regulator Board 


Power-On Diagnostics 
Extended Diagnostics 
Power Supply 
Vertical Reference Voltage 
Vertical Accuracy 
System Vertical RMS Noise 
Sweep Rate Accuracy 
Triggering 


A5 Time Base/Controller 
Board 


Power-On Diagnostics 
Extended Diagnostics 


A8 CRT Driver Board 


Display 


A9 Touch Panel Assembly 


Power-On Diagnostics 
Extended Diagnostics 


A10 Front Panel Control 
Board 


Power-On Diagnostics 
Extended Diagnostics 


A1 1 Front Panel Button 
Board 


Power-On Diagnostics 
Extended Diagnostics 


A1 2 Rear Panel Board 


Power-On Diagnostics 
Extended Diagnostics 


A13 Mother Board 


Power-On Diagnostics 
Extended Diagnostics 


A14 Input/Output Board 


Power-On Diagnostics 
Extended Diagnostics 
Real Time Clock 


A15 MMU Board 


Power-On Diagnostics 
Extended Diagnostics 


A1 7 Executive Processor 
Board 


Power-On Diagnostics 
Extended Diagnostics 


A18 Memory Board 


Power-On Diagnostics 
Extended Diagnostics 



11801C Service Manual 



6-77 




Corrective Maintenance 



Table 6-4: Checks Required After FRU Replacement (Cent.) 



FRU Replacement 


Checks Required 


A1 9 Strobe/TDR Buffer 
Board 


Power-On Diagnostics 
Extended Diagnostics 
Sweep Rate Accuracy 
Internal Clock 


A20-A23 Head Interconnect 
Boards 


Power-On Diagnostics 
Vertical Accuracy 
System Vertical RMS Noise 


A26 M/F Acquisition 
Interconnect Board 


Power-On Diagnostics 
Extended Diagnostics 
Vertical Reference Voltage 


A24/A27 Acquisition Analog 
Boards 


Power-On Diagnostics 
Extended Diagnostics 
Vertical Accuracy 
System Vertical RMS Noise 


A25/A28 Acquisition MPU 
Boards 


Power-On Diagnostics 
Extended Diagnostics 


Firmware ICs 


Power-On Diagnostics 
Extended Diagnostics 


Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) 


Display 


Power Supply Module 


Power-On Diagnostics 
Extended Diagnostics 
Power Supply 
Vertical Reference Voltage 
Vertical Accuracy 
System Vertical RMS Noise 
Sweep Rate Accuracy 



6-78 



Maintenance 




Diagnostic Troubieshooting 



This section provides the information necessary to troubleshoot a faulty 
oscilloscope to the field replaceable unit (FRU) level. In most cases, an FRU 
is a circuit board. The primary means for troubleshooting is to use the error 
index code output from the Kernel diagnostics and cross-reference them to 
the suspect circuit boards in the following tables, or to use the built-in FRU 
help function available in Extended Diagnostics. In addition, conventional 
troubleshooting techniques are described at the end of this section to help 
identify a faulty A4 Regulator board, CRT, Power Supply module, A13 Mother 
board, or A8 CRT Driver board. 



Diagnostics Ovorviow subsystem processors (Executive, Display, Time Base, and Acquisition) 

execute a set of Kernel diagnostics prior to the Self-Test diagnostics. After 
the Acquisition processor has verified its support circuitry, it tries to establish 
communication with the Time Base processor. After the Time Base proces- 
sor has verified its critical support circuitry and after it has attempted to 
communicate with the Acquisition processor, the Time Base processor 
attempts to communicate with the Executive processor. Likewise, the Dis- 
play processor attempts to communicate with the Executive processor after 
successfully executing its Kernel diagnostics. 

After a processor has successfully completed its Kernel diagnostics and 
established communications with the next order processor (for example, 
Acquisition-to-Time Base and Time Base-to-Executive), then the Self-Test 
diagnostics execute to verify the more global functionality of the processor’s 
hardware system. After all the Self-Test diagnostics are executed, any fail- 
ures cause the oscilloscope to enter Extended Diagnostics and to display 
the error index codes in a diagnostic menu. Extended diagnostics contains 
tests which are a superset of the Self-Test. 

The Kernel diagnostics (low-level Self-Test diagnostics) and Self-Test/Ex- 
tended Diagnostics produce and format error index codes differently, so 
they are covered separately. Kernel diagnostics error index codes for each 
subsystem are produced and read quite differently from each other. 

Note that some of these tests that may indicate faulty FRU(s) are not 
executed automatically during the Self-Test diagnostics (that is, some errors 
codes are only generated by manually selecting tests or Extended Diagnos- 
tics). 



11801C Service Manual 



6-79 





Diagnostic Troubieshooting 



Kernel Diagnostics 



Kernel diagnostics are executed each time the front panel ON/STANDBY 
switch is set to ON. The oscilloscope performs power-on diagnostics on its 
microprocessor subsystems and Self-Test diagnostics on all of its major 
circuits. 

When Kernel diagnostics begin, the messages Diagnostics in Progress 
and Comm Test in Progress are displayed. If the oscilloscope is being 
powered-on from a cold condition, then the diagnostics may complete 
before the CRT is warmed up and able to display these messages. 

Diagnostic routines are performed in parallel on each of the instrument’s 
processor subsystems: Display, Executive, Time Base, and Acquisition. 
Following successful execution of their Kernel diagnostics, the Acquisition 
processor attempts to communicate with the Time Base processor and the 
Time Base and Display processors attempt to communicate with the Execu- 
tive processor. 

The Executive processor will continue Self-Test diagnostics even if it is the 
only processor that has successfully completed its Kernel diagnostics. 

In the case where the Display processor has not communicated successfully 
with the Executive processor, the message indicating that Self-Test diagnos- 
tics are beginning will not appear on the screen. Kernel diagnostic failures 
may be indicated by the message, Dsy Kernel Failure, or Comm Test in 
Progress on the screen and/or a single high-low beep and illuminated 
menu buttons. 

If either the Display, Time Base, or Acquisition processors do not successful- 
ly pass their communications stage, then the oscilloscope automatically 
enters Extended Diagnostics at the end of the Self-Test diagnostics. If the 
Display processor is at fault, then the Extended Diagnostic menu will not 
appear on the screen. 

The Kernel diagnostic tests execute concurrently in all three subsystem 
processor circuits at power-on. Hardware critical to diagnostic operation is 
verified, such as ROM, RAM, DMAs, timers, and interrupt control circuitry. 

For the Executive Processor, this requires checking basic operation for most 
boards in the card cage (that is, those boards plugged in to the At 3 Mother 
board). The last step of Kernel diagnostics for the Display, Time Base, and 
Acquisition processors is to verify communication. Within each processor, all 
Kernel diagnostics must execute without failures before the Self-Test diag- 
nostics can execute. However, the Executive processor continues with its 
Self-Test diagnostics despite a communication failure encountered with the 
Display and/or Time Base processors; and the Time Base processor does 
not halt when it has a communication failure with the Acquisition processor. 

Since the condition of the instrument is unknown at power-on, when a kernel 
failure occurs. Kernel diagnostics in the Executive, Time Base, and Acquisi- 
tion processors do not attempt to display error index codes. Instead, these 
processors generate hexidecimal (hex) numbers that are read as a series of 
binary bits, such as XXX1 01 01 (hex error code 1 5/,ex) for the Executive 
processor: 01 00 (hex error code %ex) for the Time Base processor; or 



6-80 



Maintenance 





Diagnostic Troubleshooting 



1 0 (hex error code for the Acquisition processor, from either internal 
test points or LEDs. Refer to Tables 6-10, 6-15, and 6-16 for more informa- 
tion and examples of these hex error codes. 

The Display kernel diagnostics display an error message on the screen 
giving the name of the test that failed. For example, the following message 
indicates that the DMA 0 test failed: 

Dsy Kernel Failure 
DMAO 

If the error message does not appear on the screen, the error index code 
can be obtained from the status LEDs and pins on the A15 Memory Man- 
agement Unit board (see Figure 6-34). 



Self-Test/Extended 

Diagnostics 



Refer to the Power-On Diagnostics procedure in the Performance Verification 
section for information about Self-Test/Extended Diagnostics. 

Extended Diagnostics Menu Structure 

The menu structure determines the format of the error index codes. The 
Extended Diagnostics menus are a four-level hierarchy with the Subsys (that 
is, the Subsystem) menu at the highest level. This four-level Subsystem, 
Block, Area and Routine menu hierarchy generates the error index codes. 
Each subsystem in the Subsystem menu can be selected and tested if there 
are functional processor(s) and communication paths. Each subsystem is 
broken into a number of parts, or circuit blocks, in the Block menu for the 
selected subsystem. In a similar manner, each block is broken into a num- 
ber of circuit areas in the Area menu, the third level. The fourth and lowest 
menu level is the Routine menu, which contains the smallest test unit that 
can be selected and executed. 



Extended Diagnostics Error Index Codes 

The error index codes for the Extended Diagnostics are five-digit codes 
whose first character indicates the subsystem tested. The last four digits are 
hexadecimal (^ex) numbers that indicate the Block, Area, Routine, and 
specific failure mode. For example, E2321 is decoded as follows: 

E Subsystem — Executive 

2 Block name — Front Panel 

3 Area name — Soft Keys 

2 Routine name — Column Open 
1 Failure Identity — specific failure mode 

Table 6-5 lists the subsystem character for the Extended Diagnostic error 
index codes. 



11 801 C Service Manual 



6-81 





Diagnostic Troubieshooting 



Table 6-5: Extended Diagnostics Error index Code Descriptions 



Description 


Meaning 


E 


Executive 


D 


Display 


T 


Time Base 


m 


Mainframe Acquisitions 


a 


SM-11 multi-channel unit A Acquisition 


b 


SM-11 multi-channel unit B Acquisition 


c 


SM-1 1 multi-channel unit C Acquisition 


d 


SM-1 1 multi-channel unit D Acquisition 



Front panel controls are active during the Seif-Test diagnostics sequence 
and any disturbance may cause a test faiiure, forcing the oscilloscope into 
the Extended Diagnostics mode. Touch the (E)Exit label twice in succession 
to remove the Extended Diagnostics menu and resume normal operation. In 
situations where the Dispiay, Time Base, or Acquisition processors have 
failed their kernel diagnostics, exiting diagnostics to normai operation will 
not be possible. 

After the Self-Test/Extended Diagnostic programs have executed, any resul- 
tant error index codes appear on the display next to the associated subsys- 
tem name in the Extended Diagnostics menu. Each subsystem that had a 
failure gives the first error encountered and the number of faiiures in the 
subsystem. 

To get a more complete list of the error index codes in a subsystem, touch 
the selector of a failed subsystem (if the failed subsystem is not already 
selected) and then touch the Block selector. Touching the Area and then 
Routine selectors shows the lowest level test routines in the selected Block. 
The currently selected Subsystem, Block, Area, and Routine are shown 
below their labels at the bottom of the Extended Diagnostics menu. Several 
function and operating mode selectors are also available at the bottom of 
the screen. When certain test routines are selected, some of these operating 
modes are non-selectable. Additionally, when some of the operating modes 
are set to certain states, some of the test routines may become non-select- 
able. 

The function and mode operators are listed below: 

■ (?)Help — displays a list of FRUs for the currently selected routine. If the 
routine had a failure, then the error index code for that routine is also 
displayed. The FRUs are normally listed as the most-to-least probable 
cause for errors in the routine. In some cases, the FRUs are listed ac- 
cording to their ease-of-replaceability in order to minimize the time 
required to identify the faulty FRU. 



6-82 



Maintenance 




Diagnostic Troubleshooting 



Within this menu, you can scan forward to the next routine or the next 
failure by touching the appropriate selectors in the lower portion of the 
screen (which functions like a simple keypad). Scanning continues in a 
circular fashion through all available subsystems. 

Upon exiting this menu, the instrument returns to the same menu level 
(that is. Subsystem, Block, Area and Routine) that it was at before the 
help function was invoked. However, the displayed menu may be differ- 
ent if any scanning was performed. 

■ (-)Delete — places an execution mark on the currently selected menu 
name (in the upper menu area) and all items beneath it, down to the 
Routine level. This inhibits the actual execution of these routines, when 
(r)Run is invoked. 

Visually, execution marks are displayed on the screen as an asterisk (*) 
immediately to the left of the menu name (in the upper menu area). If 
one, but not all, menu names in a menu are marked with an asterisk, 
then the name of the menu at the next highest level (that is, from Area to 
Block) is preceded by an execution mark of a minus (-). 

■ (+)Add — removes the execution mark, if present, on the currently 
selected menu name and all execution marks on items (that is, blocks, 
areas, or routines) below the currently selected menu name (down to 
the Routine level). The execution mark, if present, will change from an 
asterisk (*) or minus (-) to a space. 

■ (D)Debugger — normally cannot be selected and is used by qualified 
service personnel only. 

■ E(Exit) — terminates Extended Diagnostics and returns the instrument 
to normal operating mode, but only if this selector is touched twice in 
succession. The first touch causes a confirmation prompt to appear at 
the top of the screen; the second touch causes the actual termination of 
the Extended Diagnostics. 

■ (p)Loop — toggles On and Off. When On, the selected test(s) is 
executed continuously with the number of iterations displayed. 

■ (t)Terse — toggles On and Off. When On, tests in the loop mode 
execute at the fastest rate, but the iteration (i.e. Loop) readout is not 
updated until the test is stopped (by touching the screen or a button). 

■ (x)Ali — toggles On and Off. When On, all tests in the current menu are 
selected to execute when started. 

■ (s)Stop on Err — toggles On and Off. When On, testing stops after the 
first failed test completes. 

■ (r)Run/(q)Quit — starts or stops the currently selected tests. 



11801C Service Manual 



6-83 





Diagnostic Troubieshooting 



Diagnostic Menus 



The upper portion of the display screen is used to display diagnostic menus. 
Menus are comprised of menu items and menu fields. Menu items are rows 
of items that can be selected, while menu fields are columns of status in- 
formation. 

There are four tiers of menus which may appear in the menu area (only one 
is present at any given time), the Subsystem, Block, Area and Routine 
menus. Upon entry into any menu, there is always one menu item which is 
selected. Additionally, only one menu item can be selected at any given 
time. 

The following field descriptions apply for Subsystem, Block, Area and Rou- 
tine menus. 

Subsystem, Block and Area menus are divided into the following four fields: 
Execution Mark, Title, Error Index Code, and Failure Count. The Routine 
menu has these and three additional test result fields. 

■ Execution Mark — is a one character field preceding the Title field and 
succeeding the keystroke selector identification. The three values of this 
field and their meanings are as follows: 

‘ ’ All routines in this Subsystem, Block, or Area are available for 
execution 

**’ No routines in the Subsystem, Block, or Area are available for 
execution 

One or more routines in the Subsystem, Block, or Area are 
available for execution 

Refer to the Delete and Add descriptions for further information. 

■ Title field — contains the name of individual hardware Subsystems, 
Blocks, Areas, or Routines. 

■ Error Index Code field — contains an index code. The index field may 
contain one of five types of status (indicating one of four types of tests), 
providing the following information: 

“pass” An automatic test has executed and did not fail. 

“Yxxxx” A test has failed and the failure encountered in subsys- 

tem Y is xxxx. This index code contains one digit each 
for Subsystem identification. Block identification. Area 
identification, Routine identification, and a Test identifier 
that gives some specific information about the failure. 

“****” y^i-, automatic test has not yet been executed. When the 

test does execute, the test will provide either pass or 
Yxxxx failure status. 

“ ” The test requires you to perform some type of test 

set-up using the RS-232-C loopback connector. When 
executed, this status provides pass or Yxxxx failure 
status. To execute this test, you must select it. 



6-84 



Maintenance 





Diagnostic Troubleshooting 



“ ” (blank) This status indicates that the test requires action from 
the user (such as the front panel verification tests), or 
that the test is for stimulus only (such as the manual 
calibration tests). This status does not provide failure 
status. To execute this test, select it individually. 

“????” This status indicates that an option was found that was 

not present in the current instrument configuration or 
that a subsystem was found that did not have a working 
communication path. 

■ Failure Count field — indicates the total number of routine failures (one 
per routine) currently encountered in the Subsystem, Block or Area. 
Thus, the Failure Count will never be more than the total number of 
routines in the subsystem. If no tests have been executed or no failures 
have occurred, this field is blank. Since the failure count field is an 
indication of all routines that have failures, it is possible to have a failure 
field count greater than the loop count (for example, there may be five 
routine failures after the first loop). 

A field display of 65535+ indicates that the Failure Count field has gone 
beyond 65534 and that an overflow condition has occurred. 

The following field descriptions apply only to Routine menus. 

■ Test Results fields — contain information useful for troubleshooting. 
One of the following formats is used: 

■ test address, expected data, and actual data 

■ expected data lower bound (minimum), expected data upper bound 
(maximum) and actual data 

Diagnostic Menu Hardcopy 

Press the hardcopy button on the front panel to make hardcopy of the 
diagnostic menu. The hardcopy is sent to a printer attached to the PRINTER 
port. Screen hardcopies can also be obtained from other menus (for exam- 
ple, help menus, interactive test menus, and hardware debugger menus). 

After a hardcopy is output, a Form Feed is issued to the printer. If no printer 
is attached or the printer can not print (for example, if the printer is off line or 
if the printer is out of paper), then the following warning is shown in the 
Input/Prompt area: 

Hardcopy absent or off line. 

The hardcopy function is unavailable for some tests requiring human inter- 
action, such as touch panel interactive tests, various display tests, and 
CRT/touch panel calibration patterns. 

The knobs control the screen intensity during the four main diagnostics 
menu levels. The TOUCH PANEL ON/OFF button enables/disables the touch 
panel response to user touches. 



11801C Service Manual 



6-85 





Diagnostic Troubieshooting 



Diagnostic Terminai 
Mode (RS-232-C) 



The RS-232-C port drives a terminal which conforms to the ANSI 3.64 stan- 
dard. In this mode, the terminal provides a screen-driven, interactive human 
interface. 

This mode is useful when either the display or touch panel is not functioning 
properly, or when it is desired to remotely use the diagnostics with a modem 
and phone link. 

There are several single terminal keystroke commands which are equivalent 
to front panel buttons or are terminal-only commands, all of which do not 
appear on any of the display screens. The following terminal keystrokes do 
appear on the screen and are shown in quotes: 

■ ‘B’<baud rate> <cr> — this keystroke, followed by the baud rate and 
carriage return) allows you to change the default baud rate to any one of 
the allowable product baud rates (300, 1200, 9600, 19200). The default 
power-up baud rate is determined from the position of two internal 
jumpers located on the A14 I/O board. (The Default setting is for 9600 
baud.) 

■ T’ — this keystroke toggles the screen output between the current 
screen display and an ANSI compatible terminal. The terminal should 
initially be set in its ANSI mode. 

■ ‘K’ — this keystroke toggles the screen output between the current 
screen display and a Tektronix 4x05 terminal (4105, 4205). 

■ ‘L’ — this keystroke toggles the screen output between the current 
screen display and a Tektronix 4x07 terminal (4107, 4207). 

■ ‘H’ — this keystroke produces a hardcopy of the current diagnostic 
menu as described earlier. 

■ ‘O’ — this keystroke disables/enables the touch panel response to the 
user’s touches. It is equivalent to the TOUCH PANEL ON/OFF button. 

■ ‘Q’ — this keystroke, when used in interactive test menus, stops and 
starts the display information in the keypad prompt area. This keystroke 
is equivalent to the ACQUISITION RUN/STOP button in those menus. 

To gain access to the terminal mode diagnostics, the instrument must be in 
the Extended Diagnostic mode. 

To exit the terminal mode, either recycle the power, enter the (Exit) keystroke 
twice to begin normal operation, or enter the appropriate ‘L’, T, or ‘K’ 
keystroke to transfer the screen output back to the instrument display. 



6-86 



Maintenance 





Diagnostic Troubleshooting 



System Mode (GPIB 
& RS-232-C) 



The Self-Test diagnostics and Extended Diagnostics are accessible using the 
two commands listed in Table 6-6. 



Table 6-6: System Mode Commands 



Header 


Argument 


Notes 


TEST 




Set-only 


TEST 


[XTND] 


Set-only 


TEST 


[MAN] 


Set-only 


DIAG? 




Query-only 



The TEST command invokes Self-Test diagnostics or Extended Diagnostic 
execution. The TEST command without arguments initiates Self-Test diag- 
nostics. The TEST command with argument XTND initiates Extended Diag- 
nostics. 

Refer to the CSA 803C and 1 1801C Digital Sampling Oscilloscope Program- 
mer Manual for more information on TEST and DIAG command syntax and 
usage. 

The return of one of two event codes listed in Table 6-7 to the GPIB and 
RS-232-C ports signals that diagnostic testing is complete. 



Table 6-7: Event Code Descriptions 



Event Code 


Explanation 


460 


Self-Test or Extended Diagnostics were completed 
successfully 


394 


Self-Test or Extended Diagnostics were completed and 
failed 



In either case, a GPIB/RS-232-C controller may obtain pass/fail information 
through the DIAG? query. 

The TEST command with argument MAN initiates the Extended Diagnostics 
similarly to entering Extended Diagnostics through the front panel UTILITY 
menu. The primary use of this command is to provide the remote operator a 
convenient way of accessing the diagnostics through the normal RS-232-C 
interface so that the operator can use the Diagnostic Terminal Mode to do 
remote testing. 




The TEST command with argument MAN violates normal GPIB 
protocols in that, when used, the instrument becomes non-respon- 
sive to further GPIB commands until normal operation is resumed. 



11 801 C Service Manual 



6-87 





Diagnostic Troubieshooting 



The DIAG? query returns pass/fail information from the most recent invoca- 
tion of Self-Test diagnostics or Extended Diagnostics. Examples of possible 
responses and explanations are as follows: 

DIAG PASSED: NONE 

This response indicates that the Self-Test diagnostics or Extended Diagnos- 
tic operation did not detect any test faults. 

DIAG FAILED: E1311, E1711, E1721, E1731 

This response indicates that the Extended Diagnostic operation detected 
test faults. 



DIAG FAILED: E1311, D1211,T1431 

This response indicates that the Self-Test diagnostics or Extended Diagnos- 
tic operation detected test faults. 

DIAG BYPASSED 

This response indicates that a power-on has occurred and that Self-Test 
diagnostics were bypassed through a jumper on the At 4 I/O board. 



6-88 



Maintenance 





Diagnostic Troubleshooting 



Battery Testing 



The oscilloscope holds four lithium batteries to provide power when the 
instrument is turned off. The following discussions provide criteria for deter- 
mining if a battery has exceeded its lifetime and is thus causing incorrect 
instrument operation. (A battery’s lifetime will typically exceed five years.) If 
the battery voltage measures (at 20° C) equal to or greater than the voltages 
given, then the circuit should operate correctly from 0° C to 50° C. (These 
voltage measurements are taken with the instrument power off.) 

Battery BT130 provides power for the real time clock on the At 4 I/O board. If 
the clock begins to lose time rapidly when the instrument is turned off or the 
diagnostics report that the Real Time Clk (E42XX) has failed, the battery 
should be tested. If the battery voltage measures less than 2.7 V, then the 
most likely source of the problem is the battery and you should follow the 
instructions for battery replacement and disposal earlier in this section. 

Battery BT150 provides power for the nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM) on the At 8 
Memory board. If the diagnostics consistently report an NVRAM Battery 
(E141X) failure over multiple power-ons, then the battery should be tested. If 
the battery voltage measures less than 2.7 V, then the most likely source of 
the problem is the battery and you should follow the instructions for battery 
replacement and disposal earlier in this section. 

Sockets tor devices U500 and U51 1 provide power for the NVRAM on the A5 
Time Base/Controller board. If the diagnostics consistently report a Static 
RAM Battery (T1331) failure over multiple power-ons, then the batteries 
should be tested. If either one of the battery voltages measures less than 
2.1 V as measured on pin 28 (Vcc), follow the instructions for battery re- 
placement and disposal earlier in this section. (It is recommended that both 
batteries be replaced at the same time.) 

NOTE 



Turning the instrument off while Extended Diagnostics is executing 
one of the NVRAM memory tests may cause failure of the NVRAM 
battery test. If the diagnostics report an NVRAM battery failure, then 
exit the diagnostics. This will rewrite the confidence words into the 
NVRAM. Turn the instrument off for at least one hour. Then, turn the 
instrument back on. If the diagnostics still indicate an NVRAM 
battery failure, then the battery should be tested. 



11801C Service Manual 



6-89 





Diagnostic Troubieshooting 



Clearing NVRAM 



Before a power-up Self-Test begins — but just after the Executive processor 
has run its Kernel Diagnostics — the front panel buttons are scanned by the 
Executive processor. If the Executive processor senses that the WAVEFORM 
and TRIGGER buttons, and only these two buttons, are pressed (i.e., 
closed) during this time, then the Executive processor resets its NVRAM to a 
default state, the Teksecure Erase Memory function. This essentially de- 
stroys all stored settings, stored traces, and saved trace descriptions. When 
this occurs, the NVRAM is initialized by filling all but a few locations with a 
default value. The following items are left intact after the NVRAM is reset: 

Number of instrument power-ons (POWERON?) 

Instrument power-on time (UPTIME?) 

Mainframe serial number (UID? MAIN) 



6-90 



Maintenance 





Diagnostic Troubleshooting 



Field Replaceable 
Unit (FRU) Guide 



This section correlates Kernel Diagnostic error index codes with the compo- 
nents or boards suspected of causing each error. The suspect FRU(s) for 
Self-Test/Extended Diagnostics error index codes are identified by using the 
built-in FRU help function, (?)Help, described under Self-Test/Extended 
Diagnostics. 

The FRU(s) in the Suspect board category in the following error index tables 
are listed in most-to-least probable cause order. If any diagnostic errors 
occur, inspect the suspect FRU for loose connections and components. 
Then, repeat the Diagnostic test. If any diagnostic errors occur again, re- 
place the suspect FRU(s) with a known good FRU or FRUs. Check that the 
new FRU is configured exactly like the old one and that any installed firm- 
ware matches the version in the old FRU. 

The error index codes and tests are divided into four groups based on the 
four processor subsystems: Executive, Display, Time Base, and Acquisition. 
Each subsystem group has a table of kernel diagnostic error index codes. In 
addition, the Executive has a table of manual test error index codes which 
help extend the confidence level of instrument functionality. 

If necessary, kernel error index codes for the Executive and Display subsys- 
tems can be read, using a logic probe, as TTL logic levels on circuit board 
pins. 



11 801 C Service Manual 



6-91 





Diagnostic Troubieshooting 



FRU Name Abbreviations 

Abbreviations of FRU names are listed in Table 6-8. 



Table 6-8: Board FRUs 



FRU 


Board 


Board No 


STROBEDR 


M/F Strobe Driver board 


(A1) 


MFPOWERR 


M/F Power Connect board 


(A3) 


REG 


Regulator board 


(A4) 


TBC 


Time Base/Controller board 


(A5) 


CRTSOC 


CRT Socket board 


(A7) 


CRTDR 


CRT Driver board 


(A8) 


TOUCH 


Touch Panel assembly 


(A9) 


FPCTRL 


Front Panel Control board 


(A10) 


FPBUT 


Front Panel Button board 


(All) 


REAR 


Rear Panel assembly 


(A12) 


MOTHER 


Mother board 


(A13) 


10 


Input/Output board 


(A14) 


MMU 


Memory Management Unit board 


(A15) 


EXP 


Executive Processor board 


(A17) 


MEM 


Memory board 


(A18) 


STROBEBUF 


Strobe/TDR Buffer board 


(A19) 


HEAD 


Head Interconnect board 


(A20-A23) 


ACQANALOG 


Acquisition Analog board 


(A24/A27) 


ACQMPU 


Acquisition MPU board 


(A25/A28) 


MFACQCON 


M/F Acquisition Interconnect board 


(A26) 



6-92 



Maintenance 




Diagnostic Troubleshooting 



Component and Module Name Abbreviations 

Abbreviations of component and module names are listed in Table 6-9. 



Table 6-9; Component Module FRUs 



FRU 


Board 


CRT 


Cathode Ray Tube 


FW 


Executive, Display, Time Base, or Acquisition Firmware 


SDI 


Serial Data Interface IC 


BATTERY 


Lithium Battery 


PS 


Power Supply Module 



NOTE 

The Executive, Display, Time Base, and Acquisition firmware is 
packaged in a single firmware (FW) kit; the individual parts are not 
available as separate components. 



11801C Service Manual 



6-93 










Diagnostic Troubieshooting 



Executive Subsystem Error Index Codes 

Error index codes for the Executive subsystem are listed in Table 6-10 along 
with the suspected FRUs. 

Bit patterns for these hexadecimal error index codes are displayed with the 
front panel MENUS LEDs in bottom-to-top bit order. The STORE/RECALL 
label represents the MSB (most significant bit) and the WAVEFORM label 
represents the LSB (least significant bit). When lit, the LEDs represent a one. 

For example, error index code l^ex causes the STORE/RECALL and TRIG- 
GER LEDs to light. 



Table 6-10: Executive Processor Kernel Error Index Codes 



Error Index/^ex 


Hybrid/IC FRUs 


Suspect Board FRUs 


IF - ID 




MEM, EXP 


1C - 19 


FW 


MEM 


18 - 16 




10, EXP 


15 




EXP 


14 




EXR MEM 


13 




FPCTRL, 10, MPU 


12 




10, EXP 


11 




10, EXP 


10 - OE 




REAR, 10, MPU 


OD 




MMU, EXP 


OC 




EXR MEM 


OB 




REAR, 10, EXR 



The status LEDs (DS306 and DS307) on the A1 7 Executive Processor board 
will flash while the Kernel diagnostic tests are executing. If a kernel failure is 
detected, then one or both LEDs will remain on. Table 6-1 1 lists the various 
LED configurations and their significance. 

Reading the Executive processor subsystem error bits from the A17 Execu- 
tive Processor board test points, TP201 (MSB) to TP205 (LSB), is also pos- 
sible. See Figure 6-33 for the location of these test points and status LEDs. 
The bits are high (-1-5 V) true. 



6-94 



Maintenance 




Diagnostic Troubleshooting 



Table 6-1 1 : Executive Processor Status LED Configuration 



DS307 


DS306 


Significance 


ON 


ON 


Power-On 


ON 


OFF 


Kernel Tests Executing 


OFF 


ON 


Kernel Tests Failed 


OFF 


OFF 


Kernel Tests Finished 



TP201 TP205 

GND (MSB) (LSB) +5V 





Figure 6-33: A17 Executive Processor Board Test Point and Status LED Locations 



Table 6-1 2 lists the Executive processor manual tests and verification proce- 
dures. If the conditions specified in the verification procedure listed are not 
met, then the suspect FRUs can be found by using the (?) Help function. 

These tests are performed manually and produce no error index code 
displays. They are included to help you locate faulty boards that the Kernel 
or Self-Test diagnostics possibly did not locate. Interconnections such as the 
A13 Mother board cables and the power supply boards are not listed; how- 
ever, these interconnections are considered as possible problem sources. 



11801C Service Manual 



6-95 




Diagnostic Troubieshooting 



Table 6-12: Executive Processor Manual Tests 



Test Verification Procedure 



Front Panel 

Verify 

Hard Keys This test allows you to interactively press the hard keys 
to verify their operation. This test verifies the operation of 
a key with both visual and audio feedback. 

This test requires operator interaction and can be 
executed only in the Routine pop-up menu with the All 
and Loop modes set to Off. Once this test is invoked, 
you can press any of the hard keys on the instrument 
and verify that the corresponding image of the key on 
the screen is highlighted, that the associated LED is 
turned on, and that an audio click is generated. 



Soft Keys This test allows you to interactively touch any of the soft 
keys and verify their operation. This test verifies the op- 
eration of a key with both visual and audio feedback. 

This test requires operator interaction and can be 
executed only in the Routine pop-up menu with the All 
and Loop modes set to Off. Once this test is invoked, 
you can touch any of the soft keys in the instrument and 
verify that a touch box is drawn around the soft key on 
the screen and that an audio click is generated. 



Knobs This test allows you to turn either of the knobs and verify 

their operation. This test verifies knob movement with 
visual feedback. 

This test requires operator interaction and can be 
executed only in the Routine pop-up menu with the All 
and Loop modes set to Off. Once this test is invoked, 
you can turn either of the knobs on the instrument and 
verify that the corresponding knob pointer on the screen 
rotates and that the associated counter value changes. 



Test Pattern 

These tests allow you to examine and adjust the CRT 
adjustments pertaining to color. 

These tests require operator interaction and are only 
executable in the Routine pop-up menu with the All and 
Loop modes set to Off. Once one of the tests is invoked, 
the operator can examine/adjust the CRT by following 
the procedure outlined in the Adjustments section. 



Gray Scale 
Green Grid 
White Grid 
Red Display 
Green Display 
Blue Display 
HV Reg Dsply 



6-96 



Maintenance 




Diagnostic Troubleshooting 



Table 6-12: Executive Processor Manual Tests (Cont.) 
Test Verification Procedure 



Internal I/O 

Tone Gen 

Ramp Tone This test verifies the capability of the instrument to gener- 
ate tones through its internal speaker. 

This test requires operator interaction and can be 
executed only in the Routine pop-up menu with the 
Loop mode set to On and the Terse and All mode set to 
Off. After invoking this test, you should verify that a high- 
speed clicking sound occurs. 

Real Time Clk 

Calibrate This test allows you to check and adjust the Real Time 
Clock period. 

This test requires operator interaction and can be 
executed only in the Routine pop-up menu with the All 
and Loop modes set to Off. Once this test is invoked, 
you can examine/adjust the real time clock period follow- 
ing the procedure outlined in the Real Time Clock proce- 
dure in the Adjustments section. 



External I/O 

Printer 

Pattern This test prints a set of patterns (all printable ASCII char- 

acters) to help you verify the external printer interface. 

This test requires operator interaction and can be 
executed only in the Routine pop-up menu with the All 
mode set to Off. Before executing this test, you should 
connect a Centronics-compatible printer to the PRINTER 
port on the rear panel of the instrument. 

RS-232 

Extern Loop This test verifies parts of the external RS-232-C interface. 

This test requires operator interaction and can be 
executed only in the Routine pop-up menu with the All 
mode set to Off. Before executing this test, you should 
plug an external loopback connector on the RS-232-C 
connector on the rear panel of the instrument. 



GPIB 



Inrpt Reset 
Reset Status 
Data Lines 
Interrupt 



These tests verify the Executive processor interface to 
the internal GPIB circuitry. The major external GPIB func- 
tions are not tested. 

This test requires operator interaction and can be 
executed only in the Routine pop-up menu with the All 
and Loop modes set to Off. Before executing this test, 
you should unplug the GPIB connector from the instru- 
ment. 











Diagnostic Troubieshooting 



Display Subsystem Error Index Codes 

The Display subsystem error index codes and suspect FRUs are listed in 
Table 6-13. 



Table 6-13: Display Processor Kernel Error Index Codes 



Error Index^ex 


Suspect Hybrid/ 
1C FRUs 


Suspect Board FRUs 


1 - 4 


FW 


MMU 


5-7 




MMU 



The name of the first Display kernel test that fails is displayed on the screen. 
The Display processor error index code is read from the A15 MMU board 
test points DIAGO (LSB) to DIAG2 (MSB). The bits are high (-1-5 V) true. 

The status LEDs (DS201 and DS200) on the A15 MMU board will flash while 
the Kernel diagnostic tests are executing. If a kernel failure is detected, then 
one or both LEDs will remain on. Table 6-14 lists the various LED configura- 
tions and their significance. See Figure 6-34 for the location of these test 
points and status LEDs. 



Table 6-14: Display Processor Status LED Configuration 



DS200 


DS201 


Significance 


ON 


ON 


Power-On 


ON 


OFF 


Kernel Tests Executing 


OFF 


ON 


Kernel Tests Failed 


OFF 


OFF 


Kernel Tests Finished 



6-98 



Maintenance 





1 1 801 C Service Manual 6-99 




Diagnostic Troubieshooting 



Time Base Processor Error Index Codes 

Error index codes for the Time Base Processor are listed in Table 6-1 5. 



Table 6-15: Time Base Processor Kernel Error Index Codes 



Error Index/^ex 


Suspect Hybrid/ 
1C FRUs 


Suspect Board FRUs 


1 




TBC 


2-3 


FW 


TBC 


4-7 




TBC 


8 - A 




TBC, MMU 


B 




TBC 


C 




TBC, MMU 



The error index code bits of the first Time Base kernel test that fails are read 
from the A5 Time Base/Controller board status LEDs ST4 (MSB), STS, ST2, 
and ST1 (LSB). The bits are true (one) when the LED is on. Also, status 
LEDs STS and ST6 indicate when the test is executing and when the test 
has failed, respectively. See Figure 6-35 for the location of these status 
LEDs. 

The patterns from the status LEDs are applicable only when the Time Base 
is executing or stopped in Kernel diagnostics. 



6-100 



Maintenance 




Diagnostic Troubleshooting 




ST1 (LSB) ST2 ST3 ST4 (MSB) STS (Test Running) STS (Test Failed) 

'' V ' 

Status LEDs 



Figure 6-35: A5 Time Base/Controller Board Status LEDs 



11801C Service Manual 



6-101 







Diagnostic Troubieshooting 



Acquisition Processor Error index Codes 

Error codes for the Acquisition Processor are listed in Table 6-1 6. 

The error index code bits of the first Acquisition kernel test that fails are read 
from the A25/A28 Acquisition MPU board status LEDs, DS101 (MSB) and 
DS100 (LSB). See Figure 6-36 for the location of these status LEDs. 

The patterns from the status LEDs are applicable only when the Acquisition 
is executing or stopped in Kernel diagnostics. 



Table 6-16: Acquisition Processor Kernel Error Index Codes 



Error Index/^ex 


Suspect Hybrid/ 
1C FRUs 


Suspect Board FRUs 


1 


FW 


ACQMPU 


2 




ACQMPU 


3 




ACQMPU, TBC, STRO- 






BEDR, MFACQCON 






Status LEDs 
/\ 






DSIOO(LSB) DS101(MSB) 




Figure 6-36: A25/A28 Acquisition MPU Board Status LEDs 



6-702 



Maintenance 





other Troubleshooting 



Power Supply 
Module 



A4 Regulator Board 



This section provides additional information and procedures for trouble- 
shooting a faulty oscilloscope to the FRU level. 



This procedure requires an Extended Diagnostics power supplies trouble- 
shooting fixture. Refer to Table 4-2 for a complete description of the equip- 
ment required. 

Module Troubleshooting 

If any Power Supply module problems are present, they appear when the 
ON/STANDBY switch is set to ON. If the green indicator beside the ON label 
fails to light, then check for the following conditions: 

■ The PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH located on the back panel is in the ON 
position. 

■ The line cord is connected to a functional power source with the same 
output voltage as set at the LINE VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the back 
panel. 

■ The fuse is good. If the fuse is blown, then replace the fuse. 

■ The fan is exhausting air from the instrument when the ON/STANDBY 
switch is ON. A defective fan causes an over-temperature shutdown in 
the power supply. 

If these checks fail to correct the problem, connect the Extended Diagnos- 
tics 1 1000-Series Power Supplies Test Fixture to the Power Supply module 
(refer to the documentation accompanying the test fixture for troubleshoot- 
ing techniques). The test fixture indicates which power supply voltage 
source is at fault. To help isolate the source of the problem, set the instru- 
ment’s ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY, and disconnect the suspected 
faulty power supply voltage source from the Power Supply module. Set the 
ON/STANDBY switch to ON. If the test fixture does not record a fault, then 
you have verified the suspected faulty power source. This procedure is only 
effective for externally shorted power supplies. Once again, refer to the 
documentation accompanying the test fixture for more troubleshooting 
information. 



This board is implicitly verified; that is, if all the other FRUs pass diagnostic 
testing, then you can assume that the A4 Regulator board is operating 
correctly as well. 



11801C Service Manual 



6-103 





Other Troubleshooting 



CRT, A7 CRT Socket 
Board, or A8 CRT 
Driver Board 



A13 Mother Board 



This procedure requires a test terminal and a compatible RS-232-C serial 
interface cable. Refer to Table 4-2 for a complete description of the equip- 
ment required. 

Module Troubleshooting 

If the oscilloscope powers on (the ON/STANDBY light is on), but the display 
gives either scrambled information or none at all, then the CRT and A8 CRT 
Driver board are suspect. The following two procedures help you determine 
whether the A1 5 MMU board or one of the CRT units, (either the CRT, the A7 
CRT Socket board, or the A8 CRT Driver board) is at fault. 

■ With the power off (ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY), remove the top 
cover, then turn the power on. Observe the two LEDs on the A15 MMU 
board and those on the A17 Executive Processor board in the card 
cage. These LEDs should flicker on and off until the diagnostic tests are 
complete and then all turn off. If any of these LEDs remain lit, it indicates 
a problem with the board on which the LED resides. If all LEDs turn off, 
then the CRT, A7 CRT Socket board, or the A8 CRT Driver board is 
suspect. 

■ With the power off, connect a test terminal (ANSI 3.64-compatible) to the 
oscilloscope with an RS-232-C cable. Touch the screen through the full 
power-on cycle to force a diagnostic error so that the instrument enters 
Extended Diagnostics. On the test terminal, type T to display the EX- 
TENDED DIAGNOSTICS menu on the terminal display. If the displayed 
errors are only for the front panel touch screen, then the CRT, the A7 
CRT Socket board or the A8 CRT Driver board is at fault. Note any other 
errors and use Table 6-5, earlier in this section, to identify the suspect 
subsystem. 



This board is implicitly verified; that is, if all the other FRUs pass diagnostic 
testing, then you can assume that the A13 Mother board is operating cor- 
rectly as well. 



6-104 



Maintenance 





Other Troubleshooting 



Fuse Testing 



The A14 I/O board has four fuses (see Figure 6-37). F200 supplies -l-5 V to 
the A12 Rear Panel board. F800 supplies -l-5 V to the A10 Front Panel Con- 
trol board and the A9 Touch Panel board. F600 supplies -i-15 V to the A14 
I/O board, card cage, A10 Front Panel Control board, A9 Touch Panel board, 
A1 1 Front Panel Button board, and A12 Rear Panel board (reduced to 
-1-12 V). F602 supplies -15 V to the A14 I/O board, card cage, A10 Front 
Panel Control board (reduced to -5 V), and A12 Rear Panel board (reduced 
to -12 V). 

■ F200 supplies -1-5 V to the A1 2 Rear Panel board. If diagnostics report 
failure of all three ports (RS-232-C, GPIB, and PRINTER), then this fuse 
is the probable suspect (assuming that the ribbon cable to the A12 Rear 
Panel board is connected). When tested with a multimeter, this fuse 
should measure less than 1 .5 Q. 

■ F800 supplies -i-5 V to the A1 0 Front Panel Control board and the A1 1 
Front Panel board. If the diagnostics report both an A9 Touch Panel 
board failure and knob failures, then this fuse is one possible source of 
this problem. When tested with an multimeter, this fuse should measure 
less than 1 Q. 

■ F600 supplies -i- 1 5 V to the A1 4 I/C board temperature sensor and tone 
generator, the lights of the A1 1 Front Panel Button board, the A9 Touch 
Panel board, the A12 Rear Panel board’s RS-232-C output line drivers, 
the card cage, and the A17 Executive Processor board’s NVRAM. If the 
NVRAM battery test and the RS-232-C External Loop Back test fail (but 
the Internal Loop Back test passes) and the A1 1 Front Panel Button 
board’s lights, temperature sensor, and tone generator are all off, then 
this fuse is the probable suspect. When tested with an multimeter, this 
fuse should measure less than 1 Q. 

■ F602 supplies - 1 5 V to the A1 4 I/C board temperature sensor and tone 
generator, A12 Rear Panel board’s RS-232-C output line drivers, the A9 
Touch Panel board, and the card cage. If the temperature sensor, tone 
generator, and RS-232-C External Loop Back test fail (but the Internal 
Loop Back test passes), then this fuse is the probable suspect. When 
tested with an multimeter, this fuse should measure less than 1 Q. 

The A14 I/C board uses the -M5 V and -15 V supplies on board to operate 
the temperature sensor and the tone generator. Cf the other card cage 
boards, the A18 Memory board uses the -i-15 V supply to operate the 
NVRAM circuitry. The information above and Table 6-17 will help you to 
identify a failure of one of these fuses. If a test fails, then check the fuses. 



WARNING 



Using a replacement fuse with an incorrect current rating may 
cause the ribbon cables to melt and create fire danger during a 
component fault. 



11 801 C Service Manual 



6-105 






Other Troubleshooting 



See Figures 6-2 and 6-37 for the location of the line fuse and the At 4 I/O 
board fuses, respectively. 

When a fuse must be replaced, unsolder the fuse from the board. Be careful 
not to damage the solder pads on the board. (It may be helpful to straighten 
the fuse leads on the rear of the board before removing the leads from their 
holes in the circuit board.) Refer to the Parts List section tor the correct value 
and part number of each fuse. 

Table 6-17: A14 I/O Board Fuse Failures 



Fuse Executive Kernel Test Failure Self-Test/Extended Test Failure 

(refer to Table 6-1 0, Executive 
Subsystem Error Index Codes) 

F200 lOhex (GPIB Interrupt) 
open 

F800 13/,ex (Front Panel Inter) 

open 

Note: The front panel lights do 
not work, so the code must be 
read from the error status test 
points (TP200-TP205) on the 
A17 Executive Processor board. 



F600 

open 



Passes the Kernel diagnostic 


Exec Control 


E1411 


3 


tests, but the front panel lights 


NVRAM 


E1411 


3 


are not lit. 


Battery 


E1411 


1 




*Data Lines 


E1421 


1 




*Addr/Data 


E1431 


1 




Internal I/O 


E3111 


1 




Temp Sensor 


E3111 


1 



Comparator 
E3111 1 
*Tone Gen 
*Ramp Tone (works) 



Note: The front panel lights, soft 
keys, and hard keys do not work. 



F602 13/,ex (Front Panel Inter) 

Note: The tone generator has a 
very different tone. 



*indicates a Manual Test forced by the operator. The test is not automatically executed by 
Self-Test diagnostics. 



6-106 



Maintenance 




Other Troubleshooting 



Fuse (F200) Fuse (F600) Fuse (F602) Fuse (F800) 




11801C Service Manual 



6-107 






Other Troubleshooting 



Time Base 
Calibration Errors 



Table 6-18 lists the time base calibration errors that can appear on the 
oscilloscope screen and the suspected faulty FRUs that cause the error. The 
FRUs are listed in the order of most to least likely source of the error. 

Time base calibration error messages with error codes greater than 100 
have two different forms, depending on when the error occurs. If the error 
occurs during power-on, then the message will say: 

Time base calibration failed at power up: 2XX 

where 2XX is the error code. 

If the error occurs at any other time, then the message will say: 

Time base calibration failed: 1XX 

where 1XX is the error code. 

Calibration data to enhance the time interpolator linearity is stored in NVRAM 
on the Time Base/Controller board. If this NVRAM fails, a T1 331 error occurs 
during power-up diagnostics. The values are written at the factory with the 
GPIB command calcorrection. 

CALCORRECTION<ui>:N 

where <ui> = 0. . .32 and N = -128. . .-1-127 




The calibration enhancement values are set at time of manufacture. 
There is no query form of this command. Do NOT reset these 
values. If a T1 331 failure occurs during extended power-up diag- 
nostics or you suspect a time interpolator error, contact Tektronix 
factory service. 



A T 1 331 failure causes all N values in the 33 ui locations to be reset to zero. 
The oscilloscope will still run, but with decreased accuracy in the time inter- 
polator linearity. Resetting NVRAM with the Teksecure feature does not affect 
the Time Base/Controller board NVRAM. 



6-708 



Maintenance 





Other Troubleshooting 



Table 6-18: Time Base Calibration Errors 



Error Message 


Error Code 


Suspect FRU 


Minor time base calibration problem: 


12 


TBC 




14 


TBC 




16 


TBC 




18 


TBC 




24 


TBC 




33 


TBC 


Time base calibration failed 


101 (201) 


TBC 


(at power-on); 


102 (202) 


TBC 




103 (203) 


TBC 




111 (211) 


TBC 




113 (213) 


TBC 




115 (215) 


TBC 




117 (217) 


TBC 




121 (221) 


TBC 




122 (222) 


TBC 




123 (223) 


TBC 




125 (225) 


TBC 




126 (226) 


TBC 




131 (231) 


TBC 

STROBEBUF 

STROBEDR 




132 (232) 


TBC 




134 (234) 


TBC 




135 (235) 


TBC 

STROBEBUF 

STROBEDR 




136 (236) 


TBC 




137 (237) 


TBC 




138 (238) 


TBC 

STROBEBUF 
STROBEDR, or 
Sampling Head 



11801C Service Manual 



6-109 








Other Troubleshooting 



Acquisition 
Caiibration Errors 



When acquisition calibration errors occur, a message will appear on the 
oscilloscope screen, followed by a number that indicates which Acquisition 
system the error was detected in. Following this number, there will be a 
string of eight, four-digit error codes that are used to identify possible faulty 
FRUs. The following example shows the form that the error message will 
appear: 

Error detected in acquisition system AA: BBBB, CCCC, DDDD, 
EEEE, FFFF, GGGG, HHHH, liil 

where the A digits represent the number of the Acquisition system, and the 
B, C, D, E, F, G, H, and i digits represent the four-digit error codes. 



The B and i digits can be ignored. If any of the C or D digits are non-zero, 
then the possible faulty FRUs, from most to least likely, are: 

ACQMPU 

MFACQCON 

ACQANALOG 

TBC 

If any of the E, F, G, or H digits are non-zero, then the possible fault FRUs, 
from most to least likely, are: 



ACQANALOG 

ACQMPU 

MFACQCON 



6-110 



Maintenance 





Options 



This section contains information on instrument and power cord options 
available for your 1 1 801 C digital oscilloscope. 



Instrument 

Options 



Your instrument may be equipped with one or more options. A brief descrip- 
tion of each available option is given in the following discussion. Option 
information is incorporated into the appropriate sections of the manual set. 
Refer to the Table of Contents for the location of option information. For 
further information and prices of instrument options, see your Tektronix 
Products Catalog or contact your local Tektronix service center. 

Option 1 M — adds connectors for SM - 1 1 instrumentation, providing up to 
1 28 additional channels for a total of 1 36 acquisition channels. 

Option 1 R — adds slide rails and rackmounting hardware to convert the 
benchtop instrument to a standard 19-inch rackmount version. This option 
can be added at any time. 



Option 1T — adds the Predefined Telecommunications Mask firmware. 
This feature is standard after serial number B020000, though it still appears 
as Option IT in the Identify (System Identification) pop-up menu. This 
option can be added to pre-B020000 instruments. 

Option A1 — replaces the standard power cord with the Universal Euro- 
pean 220 V type power cord. 

Option A2 — replaces the standard power cord with the United Kingdom 
240 V type power cord. 

Option A3 — replaces the standard power cord with the Australian 240 V 
type power cord. 

Option A4 — replaces the standard power cord with the North American 
250 V type power cord. 

Option A5 — replaces the standard power cord with the Switzerland 240 V 
type power cord. 



11801C Service Manual 



7-1 





Options 



Power Cord 
Information 



A power cord with appropriate plug configuration is supplied with each 
instrument. Table 7-1 , Power-Cord Conductor Identification, gives the color- 
coding of the conductors in the power cord. If you require a power cord 
other than the one supplied, refer to Figure 7-1 , Power-Cord Plug Identifica- 
tion. 



Table 7-1 : Power-Cord Conductor Identification 



Conductor 


Color 


Alternate Color 


Ungrounded (Line) 


Brown 


Black 


Grounded (Neutral) 


Light Blue 


White 


Grounded (Earth) 


GreenAfellow 


Green 




standard* 
North American 
115V 



Option A1 
Universai Euro 
230V 





Option A3 
Austraiian 
230V 




Option A4* 
North American 
230V 




230V 




Option 1A* 
North American 
115V/High Power 



Option IB 
North American 
3-Phase 



* Canadian Standards Association certification 
inciudes these power piugs for use in the 
North American power network 



Figure 7-1: Power-Cord Plug Identification 



7-2 



Options 




Electrical Parts 



The modules that make up this instrument are often a combination of me- 
chanical and electrical subparts. Therefore, all replaceable modules are 
listed in the Parts List section. Refer to that section for part numbers when 
using this manual. 



11801C Service Manual 



8-1 





Electrical Parts 



8-2 



Electrical Parts List 





Block Diagrams 




/- 



J18 < 






J35 



4MHz 



Data 

Buffers 



BADO-15 



Enable 



Dir 



Control 

Buffers 



Address 

Latch 



J22A — 


— 


J22B — 




J22C — 


— 


J22D — 


— 



J15 



BADO-15 



Rate Strobe. 



Internal 

Clock 

Rate 

Generator 



Clock. 



Mode. 



Latch 



D 



Function 

Decoder 



Sense 



BADO-7 



Delay 

DAC 



Delay 

DAC 



±2 

Fip Flop 






J10 



Board Select 1 



Board Select 2 



Unit Select 






Strobe Sense 1 



Strobe Sense 2 



Strobe Sense 3 



Strobe Sense 4 



Strobe Sense 3 



-•-AAAr-f-|\ 

-•-AAA^-f-K. 



Delay 1 



Delay 2 



Delay 3 



Delay 4 






Calibrator 
Out 

L— Internal 
Clock 
Out 

-To Strobe 
TDR 
Buffer 



■\ 



/ J10 



> J34 



/ 



Figure 9-1 : 11 801 C-System Functional Block Diagram 



Figure 9-2: A1 M/F Strobe Drive Board Block Diagram 



11 80 1C Service Manual 



9-1 























To/From 

Acquisition Systems 
Through Strobe 
Distribution 



Figure 9-4: A5 Time Base/Controiier Board Biock Diagram 



From A15 
MMU 




Figure 9-3: A4 Reguiator Board Biock Diagram 



Figure 9-5: A7 CRT Socket Board Block Diagram 



9-2 



11 80 1C Service Manual 



















Printer Interface 



Figure 9-6; A8 CRT Driver Board Biock Diagram 



Figure 9-7: A12 Rear Panei Assembiy Biock Diagram 



11 80 1C Service Manual 



9 -^ 





PI 05 I 
Executive < 
Data Bus | 



To/From 

A17 

Executive 

Processor 




Figure 9-8: A14 I/O Board Block Diagram 



To/From 

A5 




Display 

Interface 



Display IC 



TIDEO 



Bit Map 
RAM 



Wave- 

form 

Display 



RAM 



Figure 9-9: A15 MMU Board Block Diagram 



Microprocessor 



SYNC 



Video 

DAC 




System 

Reset 



Executive 

System 

Data 

Bus 

Executive 

System 

Address 

Bus 

Executive 

System 

Control 

Bus 



Figure 9-10: A17 Executive Processor Board Block Diagram 



9 ^ 



11 80 1C Service Manual 

































Figure 9-11: A18 Memory Board Block Diagram 



11 80 1C Service Manual 





Figure 9-13: A26 M/F Acquisition interconnect Board Block Diagram 



9-5 















9-6 





To/From 
Time Base 
Controller 



Figure 9-15: A25/A28 Acquisition MPU Board Biock Diagram 



11 80 1C Service Manual 





9-8 



11 80 1C Service Manual 




FROM JB3 

A 15 MEMORY MM6T UNIT 



TO JB9A 

A13 STROBE/TOR BUFFER 



TO J30A 

A13 STROBE/TOR BUFFER 



FROM JS3 

A3 M/F POWER CONNECT 



M/F STRD 
M/F STRQ 




^ g)j35 

I 



-= §) JS9A 

I 

— §) J30A 



TIMEBASE 

CONTRBLLER I 

BOARD jg^a 

I 

A 5 

4^4^ JE4D @- 

<0><0> JS5A @- 

J2SB (g — 
JSSC @— 

I 

JESO @ — 

I HYBRID ”1 

I PRESC 

I HYBRID I 

I EXTA (§ 



ANTISTATIC 

CONNECTION 



JB0 

I PRESCAL^ 



FRONT PANEL 



TRIGGER 

INPUTS 



FROM J3S 

A13 STROBE/TOR BUFFER 



TO J33A 

A13 STROBE/TDR BUFFER 



TO J33B 

A13 STROBE/TDR BUFFER 



FROM J13 

A3 M/F POWER CONNECT 



FROM J34 /\ 

A13 STROBE/TDR BUFFER 

FROM JIO /\ 

ASS ACQUISITION INTERCONNECT ' 



DELAY ASSEMBLY 



12 nS DELAY I 24 nS DELAY 



A6 


ji ^ 


CALIBRATOR 


J17 ^ 



|-@- 

I J35 

J3S 

I 

J37 

I 

-§) J3B 

i 

-§) J39 

I 

-§) J33A 



50 

CALIB DRIVE SIG 



-i — 4- 

J17 JS7 



JS7 FRONT PANEL 
— @ I CALIBRATOR 
OUTPUT 




STROBE DRIVE 
BOARD 



A1 

4^ 



i 



J21C 

I 

J210 



JESA @ — 

i 

JEEB — 
JEEC 

I 

J2E0 @~ 



FRONT PANEL 



INTERNAL CLOCK 
OUTPUT 



NO CABLE- 
BOARD TO BOARD 
CONNECTOR 



CSA803C Detailed Block (Cabling) Diagram <C§> 



11 80 1C Service Manual 



9-9 









9-10 



11 80 1C Service Manual 





POWER AND SYSTEM CONTROL 



NO CABLE- 
BOARD TO BOARD 
CONNECTOR 



11 801 C Detailed Block (Cabling) Diagram (Cont.)<(3> 



11 80 1C Service Manual 



9-11 










9-12 



11 80 1C Service Manual 




Replaceable Parts 



This section contains a list of the replaceable components for the 1 1 801 C. 
As described below, use this list to identify and order replacement parts. 



Parts Ordering 
Information 



Replacement parts are available from or through your local Tektronix, Inc. 
service center or representative. 

Changes to Tektronix instruments are sometimes made to accommodate 
improved components as they become available and to give you the benefit 
of the latest circuit improvements. Therefore, when ordering parts, it is 
important to include the following information in your order: 

■ part number 

■ instrument type or model number 

■ instrument serial number 

■ instrument modification number, if applicable 

If a part you order has been replaced with a different or improved part, your 
local Tektronix service center or representative will contact you concerning 
any change in the part number. 

Change information, if any, is located at the rear of this manual. 

Module Replacement 

The 1 1 801 C is serviced by module replacement, so there are three options 
you should consider: 

■ Module Exchange. In some cases, you may exchange your module for 
a remanufactured module. These modules cost significantly less than 
new modules and meet the same factory specifications. For more in- 
formation about the module exchange program, call 1 -800-TEKWIDE, 
ext. BV 5799. 

■ Module Repair. You may ship your module to us for repair, after which 
we will return it to you. 

■ New Modules. You may purchase new replacement modules in the 
same way as other replacement parts. 

Firmware Replacement 

To replace firmware in this product, order the firmware by the part number 
printed on the component label. Firmware is not listed in the replaceable 
parts lists. 



11801C Service Manual 



10-1 





Replaceable Parts 



Using the 
Replaceable 
Parts List 



The tabular information in the Replaceable Parts List is arranged for quick 
retrieval. Understanding the structure and features of the list will help you 
find the all the information you need for ordering replacement parts. 

Item Names 

In the Replaceable Parts List, an Item Name is separated from the descrip- 
tion by a colon (:). Because of space limitations, an Item Name may some- 
times appear as incomplete. For further Item Name identification, U.S. 
Federal Cataloging Handbook H6-1 can be used where possible. 

Indentation System 

This parts list is indented to show the relationship between items. The 
following example is of the indentation system used in the Description 
column: 

1 2 3 4 5 Name & Description 

Assembly andlor Component 

Attaching parts for Assembly and/or Component 

(END ATTACHING PARTS) 

Detail Part of Assembly and/or Component 
Attaching parts for Detail Part 

(END ATTACHING PARTS) 

Parts of Detail Part 

Attaching parts for Parts of Detail Part 

(END ATTACHING PARTS) 

Attaching parts always appear at the same indentation as the item they 
mount, while the detail parts are indented to the right. Indented items are 
part of, and included with, the next higher indentation. Attaching parts must 
be purchased separately, unless otherwise specified. 

Abbreviations 

Abbreviations conform to American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 
standard Y1 .1 



10-2 



Mechanical Parts List 





Replaceable Parts 





Table 10-1: 


Board FRUs 


FRU 


Part Number 


Description 


A1 


670-9365-06 


M/F Strobe Drive 


A2 


620-0022-09 


Power Supply Assembly 


A3 


670-9640-00 


M/F Power Connect 


A4 


670-9655-01 


Regulator 


A5 


672-0386-00 


Time Base/Controller (Standard) 


A5 


672-0385-00 


Time Base/Controller (w/Option 1M) 


A6 


671-4471-00 


Calibrator 


No A# 


657-0081-01 


Trigger Prescaler Hybrid 


A8 


672-1372-01 


CRT Driver 


A9 


614-0940-00 


Touch Panel Assembly 


A10 


670-8847-01 


Front Panel Control 


A11 


671-1130-00 


Front Panel Button 


A12 


671-0013-00 


Rear Panel 


A13 


671-1129-00 


Mother 


A14 


670-8854-04 


Input/Output 


A15 


671-1023-02 


Memory Management Unit 


A17 


671-2888-00 


Executive Processor 


A18 


672 -0382 -XX 


Memory 


A19 


671-2909-00 


Strobe TDR Buffer (P/0 657-) 


No A# 


657-0090-00 


Acquisition Module 


A20 


670-9366-02 


Head Interconnect (P/0 657-) 


A21 


670-9366-02 


Head Interconnect (P/0 657-) 


A22 


670-9366-02 


Head Interconnect (P/0 657-) 


A23 


670-9366-02 


Head Interconnect (P/0 657-) 


A24 


670-9364-05 


Acquisition Analog (P/0 657-) 


A25 


670-9363-01 


Acquisition MPU (P/0 657-) 


A26 


670-9361-00 


M/F Acquisition Interconnect 


A27 


670-9364-05 


Acquisition Analog (P/0 657-) 


A28 


670-9363-01 


Acquisition MPU (P/0 657-) 



11 801 C Service Manual 



10-3 



































Replaceable Parts 



CROSS INDEX - MFR. CODE NUMBER TO MANUFACTURER 

Mfr. 



Code 


Manufacturer 


Address 


City, State, Zip Code 


S0482 


SONY CONSUMER ELECTRONICS 




TOKYO JAPAN 


S3 109 


FELLER 


72 VERONICA AVE 
UNIT 4 


SUMMERSET NJ 08873 


S3629 


SCHURTER AG H 

C/0 PANEL COMPONENTS CORP 


2015 SECOND STREET 


BERKELEY CA 94170 


TK0435 


LEWIS SCREW CO 


4300 S RACINE AVE 


CHICAGO IL 60609-3320 


TK0488 


CURRAN COIL SPRING INC 


635 NW 16TH 


PORTLAND OR 97209-2206 


TK0588 


UNIVERSAL PRECISION PRODUCTS 


1775NW216TH 


HILLSBORO OR 97123 


TK1159 


IMPROVED PRODUCTS 


3400 OLYMPIC STREET 


SPRINGFIELD OR 97477 


TK1163 


POLYCAST INC 


9898 SW TIGARD ST 


TIGARD OR 97223 


TK1262 


MURPHY ELECTRONICS INC (DIST) 






TK1302 


MOUNTAIN MOLDING 


606 SECOND STREET 


BERTHOUDCO 80513 


TK1416 


SHARP CORP 


22-22 NAGAIKE-CHO 
ABENO-KU 


OSAKA JAPAN 


TK1465 


BEAVERTON PARTS MFG CO 


1800 NW216TH AVE 


HILLSBORO OR 97124-6629 


TK1499 


AMLAN INC 


97 THORNWOOD RD 


STAMFORD CT 06903-2617 


TK1547 


MOORE ELECTRONICS INC (DIST) 


19500 SW 90TH COURT 
PO BOX 1030 


TUALATIN OR 97062 


TK1572 


RAN -ROB INC 


631 85TH AVE 


OAKLAND CA 94621 - 1 254 


TK1617 


CRAFT FACTORY PLASTICS 


17145 SW ALEXANDER 


ALOHA OR 97007 


TK1719 


NEDELCO BV (THOMAS & BETTS) 


POSTBUS 6431 


3002 AK ROTTERDAM THE 
NETHERLANDS 


TK1727 


PHILIPS NEDERLAND BV 
AFD ELONCO 


POSTBUS 90050 


5600 PB EINDHOVEN THE 
NETHERLANDS 


TK1869 


ALPS 


100 N CNTRE AVE 


ROCKVILLE CENTRE NY 1 1 570 


TK1905 


PUGET CORP OF OREGON 


7440 S W BONITA 


TIGARD OR 97223 


TK1916 


SKS DIE CASTING CO 


2200 4TH 


BERKELEY CA 94710-2215 


TK1943 


NEILSEN MANUFACTURING INC 


3501 PORTLAND ROAD NE 


SALEM OR 97303 


TK1967 


SYNDETEK 


3915 E MAIN 


SPOKANE WA 99202 


TK2072 


PRECISION DECORATORS INC 
HAWTHORNE BUSINESS CENTER 


5289 NE ELAM YOUNG PARKWAY 
SUITE G400 


HILLSBORO OR 97124 


TK2105 


QUALTEK ELECTRONICS CORP 
FAN-S DIV 


7158 INDUSTRIAL PARK BLVD 


MENTOR OH 44060 


TK2122 


INDUSTRIAL GASKET INC 


1623 SE6THAVE 


PORTLAND OR 97214-3502 


TK2338 


ACC MATERIALS 


ED SNYDER 
BLDG 38-302 


BEAVERTON OR 97077 


TK2435 


MEC IMEX INCORPORATED 


6TH FLOOR 162 CHANG AN E ROAD 
SEC 2 


TAIPEI, TAIWAN ROC 


TK2469 


UNITREK CORPORATION 


3000 LEWIS & CLARK WAY 
SUITE #2 


VANCOUVER WA 98601 


0B445 


ELECTRI-CORD MFG CO INC 


312 EAST MAIN ST 


WESTFIELD PA 16950 


0JR05 


TRIQUEST CORP 


3000 LEWIS AND CLARK HWY 


VANCOUVER WA 98661 -2999 


0J260 


COMTEK MANUFACTURING OF OREGON 
(METALS) 


PO BOX 4200 


BEAVERTON OR 97076-4200 


0J9P9 


GEROME MFG CO INC 


PO BOX 737 


NEWBERG OR 97132 



10-4 



Mechanical Parts List 






Replaceable Parts 



Mfr. 

Code 

0KB01 

0KB05 

00779 

06915 

11897 

18677 

2W944 

24931 

28520 

29870 

30010 

34649 

5Y400 

50579 

52814 

53387 

61058 

61857 

66302 

71400 

75915 

78189 

80009 

83385 

83486 

83553 

85480 

93907 



CROSS INDEX - MFR. CODE NUMBER TO MANUFACTURER 



Manufacturer 


Address 


City, State, Zip Code 


STAUFFER SUPPLY 


810 SE SHERMAN 


PORTLAND OR 97214 


NORTH STAR NAMEPLATE 


1281 -S NE25TH 


HILLSBORO OR 971 24 


AMP INC 


2800 FULLING MILL 
PC BOX 3608 


HARRISBURG PA 17105 


RICHCO PLASTIC CO 


5825 N TRIPP AVE 


CHICAGO IL 60646-6013 


PLASTIGLIDE MFG CORP 


2701 W EL SEGUNDO BLVD 


HAWTHORNE CA 90250-331 8 


SCAN BE MFG CO 
DIV OF ZERO CORP 


3445 FLETCHER AVE 


EL MONTE CA91731 


PAPST MECHATRONIC CORP 


ACUIDNECK INDUSTRIAL PK 


NEWPORT Rl 02840 


SPECIALTY CONNECTOR CO INC 


2100 EARLYWOOD DR 
PC BOX 547 


FRANKLIN IN 46131 


HEYCO MOLDED PRODUCTS 


750 BOULEVARD 
P 0 BOX 160 


KENILWORTH NJ 07033-1721 


VICTOR CORP 


618 MAIN STREET 


WEST WARWICK Rl 02893 


BICC-VERO ELECTRONICS INC 


40 LINDEMAN DR 


TRUMBULL CT 0661 1 -4739 


INTEL CORP 

SALES OFFICE /ST4-2/ 


3065 BOWERS AVE 


SANTA CLARA CA 95051 


TRIAX METAL PRODUCTS INC 
DIV OF BEAVERTON PARTS MFG CO 


1800 21 6TH AVE NW 


HILLSBORO OR 97124-6629 


SIEMENS COMPONENTS INC 
OPTOELECTRONICS DIV 


19000 HOMESTEAD RD 


CUPERTINO CA 9501 4-071 2 


TECH-ETCH INC 


45ALDRIN RD 


PLYMOUTH MA 02360 


MINNESOTA MINING MFG CO 


PC BOX 2963 


AUSTIN TX 78769-2963 


MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC CORP OF 
AMERICA 

PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL CO DIV 


ONE PANASONIC WAY 
PO BOX 1502 


SECAUCUS NJ 07094-2917 


SAN-0 INDUSTRIAL CORP 


85 ORVILLE DR 
PO BOX 51 1 


BOHEMIA LONG ISLAND NY 
11716-2501 


VLSI TECHNOLOGY INC 


1109 MCKAY DR 


SAN JOSE CA 951 31 - 1 706 


BUSSMANN 

DIV OF COOPER INDUSTRIES INC 


114 OLD STATE RD 
PO BOX 14460 


ST LOUIS MO 63178 


LITTELFUSE INC 
SUB TRACOR INC 


800 E NORTHWEST HWY 


DES PLAINES IL 6001 6-3049 


ILLINOIS TOOL WORKS INC 
SHAKEPROOF DIV 


ST CHARLES ROAD 


ELGIN IL60120 


TEKTRONIX INC 


14150 SW KARL BRAUN DR 
PO BOX 500 


BEAVERTON OR 97077-0001 


MICRODOT MFG INC 
GREER-CENTRAL DIV 


3221 W BIG BEAVER RD 


TROY Ml 48098 


ELCO INDUSTRIES INC 


1101 SAMUELSON RD 


ROCKFORD IL61101 


ASSOCIATED SPRING BARNES GROUP 
INC 


15001 S BROADWAY 
P 0 BOX 231 


GARDENA CA 90248-1 81 9 


BRADY W H CO 
CORP H Q 

INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS DIV 


2221 W CAMDEN RD 
PO BOX 2131 


MILWAUKEE Wl 53209 


TEXTRON INC 
CAMCAR DIV 


600 18TH AVE 


ROCKFORD IL 61 108-5181 



11 801 C Service Manual 



70-5 




Replaceable Parts 



Fig. & 



Index 

No. 


Tektronix 
Part No. 


Seriai No. 
Effective Dscont 


Qty 


12345 Name & Description 


Mfr. 

Code 


Mfr. Part No. 










CABiNET 






10-1-1 


200-2191-00 




2 


CARRETAINERiPLASTIC 


0JR05 


ORDER BY DESC 


-2 


367-0248-01 




1 


HANDLE, CARRYING:16.341 L,W/CLIP 


TK1465 


ORDER BY DESC 


-3 


211-0718-00 




2 


SCREW, MACHINE:6-32 X 0.312, FLH, STL 


0KB01 


ORDER BY DESC 


-4 


212-0681-00 




4 


SCREW, MACHINES 0-32 X 0.25,PNH,STL 


83486 


MACHINE SCREW: 


-5 


426-2098-01 




1 


FRAME SECT,CAB.:LEFT SIDE 


TK1465 


ORDER BY DESC 


-6 


211-0721-00 




8 


SCREW, MACHINE:6-32 X 0.375,PNH,STL 


0KB01 


ORDER BY DESC 


-7 


101-0106-00 




4 


TRIM,DECORATIVE:LEFT SIDE, FRONT CASTING 


TK1163 


ORDER BY DESC 


-8 


426-2099-01 




1 


FRAME SECT,CAB.:RIGHT SIDE 


TK1465 


ORDER BY DESC 


-9 


348-0886-00 




4 


SHLD GSKT,ELEK:FINGER TYPE,18.310 L 


TK1159 


ORDER BY DESC 


-10 


348-0879-00 




4 


FOOT,CABINET:BOTTOM,BLUE,POLYCARB 


TK1163 


ORDER BY DESC 


-11 


348-0596-00 




4 


PAD,CAB.FOOT:0.69 X 0.255 X 0.06, PU 


TK2122 


348-0596-00 


-12 


348-0875-00 




1 


FLIPSTAND,CAB.: 


TK0488 


ORDER BY DESC 


-13 


211-0711-00 




4 


SCR,ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.25,PNH,STL,T15 


0KB01 


ORDER BY DESC 


-14 


214-0603-02 




8 


PIN ASSY,SECRG:W/SPRING WASHER 


0J260 


ORDER BY DESC 


-15 


386-0227-00 




8 


STORCLRRIM CL:ACETAL 


0JR05 


386-0227-00 


-16 


386-1151-00 




8 


CLAMRRIM CLENC:SPG STL 


83553 


ORDER BY DESC 


-17 


200-3415-00 




1 


COV,CAB LIFTOFF:LOWER,AL,BLUE PAINT 


80009 


200341500 


-18 


200-3759-00 




1 


COVER, CABINETTORLIFT OFF 


0J260 


ORDER BY DESC 



10-6 



Mechanical Parts List 






11 801 C Service Manual 



10-7 




Replaceable Parts 



Fig. & 



Index 


Tektronix 


Seriai No. 






Mfr. 




No. 


Part No. 


Effective Dscont 


Qty 


12345 Name & Description 


Code 


Mfr. Part No. 










FRONT PANEL 






10-2-1 


614-0940-00 




1 


SUBPANEL ASSY: 1 1801 C 
(SEE A9, EXCHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


614094000 


-2 


386-5806-00 




1 


FRAME, LENS:TOUCH PANEL 


0JR05 


ORDER BY DESC 


-3 






1 


CIRCUIT BD ASSYTOUCH PANEL 

(NOT REPLACEABLE, ORDER 61 4-091 6-XX) 






-4 


366-0600-01 




7 


PUSH BUTTON:0.269 X 0.409 ABS 


TK1163 


ORDER BY DESC 


-5 


211-0372-00 




4 


SCREW, MACHINE:4-40 X 0.31 2,PNH,STL 


93907 


B80- 00020 -003 


-6 


211-0722-00 




4 


SCREW, MACHINE:6-32 X 0.25,PNH,STL 


0KB01 


ORDER BY DESC 


-7 


386-5268-07 




1 


SUBPANEL, FRONTiFINISHED 


TK1916 


386-5268-07 


-8 


211-0721-00 




1 


SCREW, MACHINE:6-32 X 0.375,PNH,STL 


0KB01 


ORDER BY DESC 


-9 


381 -0469-00 




2 


BAR,SUPPORT:CRT 


5Y400 


ORDER BY DESC 


-10 


211-0711-00 




4 


SCR,ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.25,PNH,STL,T15 


0KB01 


ORDER BY DESC 


-11 


131-1688-00 




1 


TERM, OIK DISC.:0.250 SPADE, STUD MT;MALE 


00779 


42822-4 


-12 


154-0946-00 




1 


ELECTRON TUBE:CRT, COLOR 
(VI 30) 


S0482 


09FXES-C1 


-13 


210-0006-00 




1 


WASHER,LOCK:#6 INTL,0.018 THK.STL 


78189 


1206-00-00-0541 


-14 


211-0718-00 




5 


SCREW, MACHINE:6-32 X 0.312,FLH,STL 


0KB01 


ORDER BY DESC 


-15 


311-2320-00 




2 


ENCODER, DIGITAL:INCREMENTAL,50PPR 


TK1869 


EC24B50000FB 


-16 


671-1130-00 




1 


CIRCUIT BD ASSYFRONT PANEL BUTTON 
(SEE A1 1 , EXCHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


671113000 


-17 


348-1075-00 




2 


SHLD GSKT,ELEK:SOLID TYPE,1 .66 L 


52814 


ORDER BY DESC 


-18 


211-0410-00 




2 


SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.437,PNH,STL,T10 


93907 


829-07510-024 


-19 


260-2275-00 




1 


SWITCH, ROCKER:SPST,30MA, 12V 


TK1262 


ME010-D 




343-0549-00 




1 


STRARTIEDOWN,E:0.098 W X 4.0 L,ZYTEL 


TK1499 


HW-047 


-20 


333-3418-00 




1 


PANEL, FRONTUPPER 


TK2072 


ORDER BY DESC 


-21 


150-0121-13 




1 


LIGHT,INDICATOR:5V,GREEN,INCANDECENT 


TK1967 


ORDER BY DESC 




174-0616-00 




1 


CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,30.0 L,9-8 


TK2469 


ORDER BY DESC 


-22 


210-0586-00 




10 


NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:4-40 X 0.25, STL 


TK0435 


ORDER BY DESC 


-23 


348-1076-00 




1 


SHLD GSKT,ELEK:SOLID TYPE, 2.28 L 


52814 


ORDER BY DESC 


-24 


210-0465-00 




1 


NUT,PLAIN,HEX:0.25-32 X 0.375,BRS 


0KB01 


ORDER BY DESC 


-25 


210-0223-01 




1 


TERMINAL,LUG:0.26 ID,LOCKING,BRS TINNED 


0KB01 


ORDER BY DESC 




315-0105-00 






RES,FXD,FILM:1M OHM,5%,0.25W 
(R89) 


TK1727 


SFR25 2322-181 


-26 


348-0878-00 




1 


SHLD GSKT,ELEK:SOLID TYPE,7.646 L 


52814 


ORDER BY DESC 


-27 


103-0269-00 




3 


ADAPTER,CONN:SMA TO PELTOLA 


24931 


39JR198-1 




131-6337-00 




1 


ADAPTER,CONN:PRESCALER 


24931 


39AS1100 


-28 


333-3908-02 




1 


PANEL,FRONT:11801C,LOWER 


0KB05 


333-3908-01 


-29 


210-0895-00 




1 


WASHER,SHLDR:0.255 X 0.375 X 0.1 05 THK,NYL 


TK1617 


NA 


-30 


136-0140-00 




1 


JACK,TIP:BANANA,CHARCOAL GRAY 


TK1617 


136-0140-00 


-31 


220-0052-00 




2 


NUT,PLAIN,HEX:M9X0.75 


0KB01 


ORDER BY DESC 


-32 


384-1682-02 




2 


SHAFT,EXTENSION:1.833 L,ALUMINUM 


80009 


384168202 


-33 


366-0600-00 




4 


PUSH BUTTON:0.269 X 0.409,ABS 


TK1163 


ORDER BY DESC 


-34 


131-4763-00 




1 


CONTACT,ELEC:GROUND,CU BE 


TK2469 


ORDER BY DESC 


-35 


211-0711-00 




1 


SCR,ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.25,PNH,STL,T15 


0KB01 


ORDER BY DESC 



10-8 



Mechanical Parts List 






Replaceable Parts 



Fig. & 

Index Tektronix Serial No. Mfr. 

No. Part No. Effective Dscont Qty 12345 Name & Description Code Mfr. Part No. 







Replaceable Parts 



Fig. & 



Index 


Tektronix 


Seriai No. 






Mfr. 




No. 


Part No. 


Effective Dscont 


Qty 


12345 Name & Description 


Code 


Mfr. Part No. 










CHASSiS, REAR 






10-3-1 


200-3690-01 




1 


COVER, HIGH VOLTALUMINUM 


80009 


200369001 


-2 


211-0722-00 




8 


SCREW, MACHINE:6-32 X 0.25, PNH, STL 


0KB01 


ORDER BY DESC 


-3 


407-3438-02 




1 


BRACKET, CHASSIS:ALUMINUM 


TK1943 


ORDER BY DESC 


-4 


351 -0746-00 




2 


GUIDE,CKT BOARD:NYLON 6.803 L 


0JR05 


ORDER BY DESC 


-5 


211-0718-00 




14 


SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.312, FLH.STL 


0KB01 


ORDER BY DESC 


-6 


351 -0746-00 




1 


GUIDE,CKT BOARD:NYLON 6.803 L 


0JR05 


ORDER BY DESC 


-7 


671-0013-00 




1 


CIRCUIT BD ASSYREAR PANEL 
(SEE A12, EXCHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


671001300 


-8 


211-0721-00 




8 


SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.375, PNH,STL 


0KB01 


ORDER BY DESC 


-9 


129-1085-00 




2 


SPACER, POST:0.25 L,4-40,BRS,0.25 HEX 


TK0588 


129-1085-00 


-10 


211-0410-00 




2 


SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.437, PNH, STL, T10 


93907 


829-07510-024 


-11 


214-2476-01 




2 


HDW ASSY KITBAIL LOCK,ELEC CONN RCPT 


53387 


3475-4 


-12 


214-3106-00 




2 


HARDWARE KITJACK SOCKET 


53387 


3341 -IS 


-13 


211-0411-00 




1 


SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.5,PNH,STL,T10 


93907 


ORDER BY DESC 


-14 


386-5369-03 




1 


PLATE,CONNECTOR:STD,ALUMINUM 


TK1465 


386-5369-03 


-15 


255-0334-00 




1 


PLASTIC CHANNEL12.75X 0.175X0.155, NYLON 


11897 


122-NN-2500-060 


-16 


211-0711-00 




5 


SCR,ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.25,PNH,STL,T15 


0KB01 


ORDER BY DESC 


-17 


386-5269-02 




1 


SUBPANEL,REAR:PLATED 


TK1916 


ORDER BY DESC 


-18 


386-5283-00 




2 


SUPPORT, CHASSIS:POWER SUPPLYPOLYCARB 


0JR05 


ORDER BY DESC 


-19 


343-0081 -00 




1 


STRARRETAINING:0.125 DIA,NYLON 


85480 


CPNY-172BK 


-20 


210-0007-00 




1 


WASHER, LOCK:#8 EXT,0.02 THK.STL 


0KB01 


ORDER BY DESC 




174-1406-00 




1 


CA ASSY,SRELEC:18,AWG,6.0 L 


TK2469 


ORDER BY DESC 


-21 


214-4082-00 




2 


PIN,GUIDE:0.850 L,METAL 


TK0588 


214-4082-00 


-22 


351 -0744-00 




2 


GUIDE,PLUG-IN:POLYAMIDE 


TK1163 


ORDER BY DESC 


-23 


610-0750-00 




1 


CHASSIS ASSY: 


TK1943 


ORDER BY DESC 




407-4028-00 




1 


BRACKET, SUPPORT: 


0J9P9 


ORDER BY DESC 


-24 


119-4589-00 




1 


DELAY LINE,ELEC:COAXIAL,;24NS MTCHD PAIR 


80009 


119458900 


-25 


348-0532-00 




1 


GROMMET, PLASTIC:BLACK,ROUND,0.625 ID 


28520 


2096 


-26 


348-0253-00 




1 


GROMMET, PLASTIC:BLACK,OBLONG 


0JR05 


ORDER BY DESC 


-27 


210-0457-00 




3 


NUTPUASSEM WA:6-32 X 0.31 2, STL 


TK0435 


ORDER BY DESC 


-28 


343-0040-00 




1 


CLAMRCOIL: 


80009 


343004000 


-29 


211-0720-00 




3 


SCR,ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.50,PNH,STL,T15 


0KB01 


ORDER BY DESC 


-30 


346-0143-00 




1 


STRARTIEDOWN,E:14.5 X 0.14, PLASTIC 


TK1719 


TY244M 


-31 


108-1462-00 




2 


COIL,RF:FXD 


TK1967 


ORDER BY DESC 


-32 


343-0085-00 




2 


CLAMRLOOP:0.312 DIA,NYLON 


06915 


N5-01 


-33 


351 -0765-00 




12 


GUIDE,CKT BOARD:NYLON 


30010 


29-01 24D 


-34 


386-1559-00 




1 


SPACER, CKT BD:0.47 H,ACETAL 


80009 


386155900 


-35 






1 


CIRCUIT BD ASSYCRT SOCKET 

(NOT REPLACEABLE, ORDER 672-1372-XX) 






-36 


200-3708-00 




1 


COVER,CKT BOARD:1 


TK1943 


ORDER BY DESC 


-37 


670-8847-01 




1 


CIRCUIT BD ASSYFRONT PANEL CONTROL 
(SEE A10, EXCHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


670884701 


-38 


407-3840-00 




1 


BRACKET, SUPPORT: 


TK1943 


ORDER BY DESC 



10-10 



Mechanical Parts List 






11 801 C Service Manual 



10-11 




Replaceable Parts 



Fig. & 



Index 


Tektronix 


Serial No. 






Mfr. 




No. 


Part No. 


Effective Dscont 


Qty 


12345 Name & Description 


Code 


Mfr. Part No. 










CIRCUIT BOARDS 






10-4-1 


146-0055-00 




2 


BATTERY, DRY3.0V, 1200 MAH, LITHIUM 
(BT130, BT150) 


61058 


BR-2/3A-E2P 


-2 


159-0245-00 




4 


FUSE, WIRE LEAD:1A, 125V, FAST 
(F200, F600, F602, F800) 


71400 


TR/MCR-1 


-3 


156-3812-00 




1 


1C, PROCESSOR:HMOS, MICROPROCESSOR 
(U830) 


34649 


R80286-10 




156-3821-00 




1 


1C, PROCESSOR:NMOS, PERIPHERAL 
(U800) 


50579 


SAB82258A-1N 


-4 


156-2622-00 




1 


IC,ASIC:HMOS,SEMI CUSTOM,STD CELL 
(U330) 


66302 


VF4157RC CC0001 


-5 


671-1129-00 




1 


CIRCUIT BD ASSYMOTHER 
(SEE A13, EXCHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


671112900 


-6 


211-0722-00 




1 


SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.25, PNH, STL 


0KB01 


ORDER BY DESC 


-7 


670-9655-01 




1 


CIRCUIT BD ASSYREGULATOR 
(SEE A4, EXCHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


670965501 


-8 


159-0220-00 




1 


FUSE, WIRE LEAD:3A, 125V, FAST 
(F430) 


61857 


SP5-3A 


-9 


211-0721-00 




2 


SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.375, PNH,STL 


0KB01 


ORDER BY DESC 


-10 


211-0408-00 




5 


SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.250, PNH, STL, T10 


93907 


829-06815-024 


-11 


670-9640-00 




1 


CIRCUIT BOARD:M/F POWER CONNECT 
(SEE A3, EXCHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


670964000 


-12 


211-0711-00 




19 


SCR,ASSEM WSHR:6-32 X 0.25,PNH,STL,T15 


0KB01 


ORDER BY DESC 


-13 


670-9365-06 




1 


CIRCUIT BD ASSYM/F STROBE DRIVER 
(SEE A1, EXCHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


670936506 


-14 


672-0385-00 




1 


CIRCUIT BD ASSYTIMEBASE IM OPT 
(SEE A5 OPT. 10, EXCHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


672038500 




671 -4209-00 




1 


MODULAR ASSYTRIGGER PRESCALER 


80009 


671420901 


-15 


671 -4471 -00 




1 


CIRCUIT BD ASSYCALIBRATOR 
(SEE No, EXCHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


671447100 


-16 


672-1372-01 




1 


CIRCUIT BD ASSYCRT DRIVER 
(SEE A8, EXCHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


672137201 


-17 


159-0235-00 




1 


FUSE, WIRE LEAD:0.75A,125V,FAST 
(F330) 


71400 


TR/MCR 3/4 


-18 


407-3824-00 




1 


BRACKET, SUPPORTHV XFMR,0.062 AL 


5Y400 


ORDER BY DESC 


-19 


213-0992-00 




1 


SCREW,TPG,TF:4-24 X 0.375, PNH, STL 


93907 


B80- 70000 -003 


-20 


671-1023-02 




1 


CIRCUIT BD ASSYMEMORY MANAGEMENT UNIT 
(SEE A15, EXCHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


671102302 


-21 


670-8854-04 




1 


CIRCUIT BD ASSYINPUT/OUTPUT 
(SEE 14, EXCHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


670885404 


-22 


671-1890-00 




1 


CIRCUIT BD ASSYMEMORY 
(SEE A18, EXCHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


671189000 


-23 


671 -2888-00 




1 


CIRCUIT BD ASSYEXECUTIVE PROCESSOR 


80009 


671288800 



(SEE Ml, EXCHANGE ITEM) 



70-72 



Mechanical Parts List 






11 801 C Service Manual 



10-13 




Replaceable Parts 



Fig. & 
Index 
No. 



Tektronix 
Part No. 


Seriai No. 
Effective Dscont 


Qty 


12345 Name & Description 


Mfr. 

Code 


Mfr. Part No. 








WiRE ASSEMBLiES 

(SEE MAINT SECTION FOR CABLING DIAGRAM) 






174-3076-00 




1 


CA ASSY,RF:COAXIAL,RFD,50 OHM, 0.10 D,6.5 L 
(FROM A4J66 TO A2A2J66) 


80009 


174307600 


174-0563-00 




1 


CA ASSYSRELEC:8,18 AWG,8.0 L 
(FROM A4J64 TO A2A2J64) 


TK1967 


ORDER BY DESC 


174-0576-00 




1 


CA ASSYSRELEC:50,28 AWG,10.3 L, RIBBON 
(FROM A26J10TO A1J10) 


TK1547 


ORDER BY DESC 


174-0577-00 




1 


CA ASSYSRELEC:1 6,28 AWG,7.5 L, RIBBON 
(FROM A19J34 TO A1J34) 


TK1547 


ORDER BY DESC 


174-0580-00 




1 


CA ASSYSRELEC:50,28 AWG,14.0 L,RIBBON 
(FROM A18J83 TO A5J83) 


TK1547 


ORDER BY DESC 


174-0609-00 




1 


CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,1 1 .0 L,9-0-5 
(FROM A1J35 TOA5J35) 


TK2469 


ORDER BY DESC 


174-3076-00 




1 


CA ASSYRF:COAXIAL,RFD,50 OHM,0.10 D,6.5 L 
(FROM A5J32 TO A19J32) 


80009 


174307600 


174-0623-00 




1 


CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,6.0 L.9-0 
(FROM A1 9J30A TO A5J30B) 


TK2469 


ORDER BY DESC 


174-0624-00 




1 


CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,6.0 L.9-N 
(FROM A1 9J29A TO A5J29B) 


TK2469 


ORDER BY DESC 


174-0625-00 




1 


CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,17.5 L,9-3 
(FROM A1 9J33B TP A1 J33B) 


TK2469 


ORDER BY DESC 


174-0751-00 




1 


CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,34.0 L,9-7 
(FROM A1J17TO A6J17) 


TK2469 


ORDER BY DESC 


174-0827-00 




1 


CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,17.5 L,9-03 
(FROM A1 J33A TO A1 9J33A) 


TK2469 


ORDER BY DESC 


174-1557-00 




1 


CAASSYSRELEC:8,22AWG, (4)12.5 L,(4)1 1.125 L 
(FROM A10J74 TO ENCODERS S74 AND S75) 


TK1967 


ORDER BY DESC 


174-1559-00 




1 


CA ASSYSRELEC:8,26 AWG,12.0 L 
(FROM A7J56 TO A8J56) 


TK1967 


ORDER BY DESC 


174-1560-00 




1 


CA ASSYSRELEC:4,26 AWG,21 .0 L, RIBBON 
(FROM A4J57 TO A8J57) 


TK1967 


ORDER BY DESC 


174-1561-00 




1 


CA ASSYSP:RIBBON,;CPR,3,26 AWG,9.0 L 
(FROM A8J52 TO A15J52) 


TK1967 


ORDER BY DESC 


174-1743-00 




1 


CAASSYPWR:DESCRETE,;PSC,4,18AWG,18.5 L 
(FROM A2A2J63 TO A1 3J63A) 


TK1967 


ORDER BY DESC 


174-1744-00 




1 


CA ASSYSRELEC:50,28 AWG 
(FROM A1 0J72 TO A1 4J72) 


TK1547 


ORDER BY DESC 


174-2030-02 




1 


CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,5.0 L,W/BL JKT 
(FROM A5J88 TO FRONT PANEL J88) 


TK2338 


174-2030-02 


174-3781-00 




1 


CABLE ASSY, RF:50 OHM COAX, 8.76 L,SEMI-RIGID 
(FROM A4J87 TO FRONT PANEL J87) 


TK2338 


174-3781-00 


174-1426-00 




1 


CA ASSYSRELEC:34,26 AWG,8.0 L 
(FROM A5J18TOA1J18) 


80009 


174142600 


175-9803-00 




3 


CA ASSYSP:RIBBON,;CPR,7,26 AWG, 7.5 L 
(FROM A2A2J65 TO A4J65) 

(FROM A7J53 TO A15J53) 

(FROM A5J16TOA1J16) 


TK1967 


ORDER BY DESC 



10-14 



Mechanical Parts List 






Replaceable Parts 



Fig. & 
Index 


Tektronix 


Serial No. 




Mfr. 




No. 


Part No. 


Effective Dscont Qty 


12345 Name & Description 


Code 


Mfr. Part No. 




175-9814-00 


1 


CA ASSY, SRELEC:34, 3.0 L 
(FROM A1 4J77 TO A1 7J77) 


TK1547 


ORDER BY DESC 




175-9857-00 


1 


OA ASSYSRELEC:1 1 ,18 AWG,7.25 L,RIBBON 
(FROM A4J62 TO A2A2J62) 


TK1967 


ORDER BY DESC 



11 801 C Service Manual 



10-15 






Replaceable Parts 



Fig. & 



Index 

No. 


Tektronix 
Part No. 


Seriai No. 
Effective Dscont 


Qty 


12345 Name & Description 


Mfr. 

Code 


Mfr. Part No. 










ACQUiSiTiON MODULE 








657-0090-00 




1 


MODULAR ASSYACQUISITION MODULE, 1 1 801 0 
(EXCHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


657009000 


10-5-1 


670-9363-01 




1 


CIRCUIT BD ASSYACCUISITION MPU 
(SEE A25. EXHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


670936301 


-2 


670-9364-05 




1 


CIRCUIT BD ASSYACCUISITION ANALOG 
(SEE A24. EXHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


670936405 


-3 


670-9363-01 




1 


CIRCUIT BD ASSYACCUISITION MPU 
(SEE A28, EXCHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


670936301 


-4 


670-9364-05 




1 


CIRCUIT BD ASSYACCUISITION ANALOG 
(SEE A27, EXCHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


670936405 


-5 


426-2167-00 




1 


FRAME SECT, CAB. :MODULE 


TK1465 


426-2167-00 


-6 


351 -0784-00 




3 


GUIDE,CKT BD:UPPER,PR7.0 L 


TK1905 


GRDER BY DESC 


-7 


211-0392-00 




6 


SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.25,FLH,STL,T-8 


93907 


GRDER BY DESC 


-8 


426-2168-00 




1 


FRAME SECTCAB.:MODULE 


TK1465 


426-2168-00 


-9 


131-1247-00 




1 


TERM,QIK DISC.:0.187 X 0.02 BLADE,45 DEG 


00779 


61664-1 


-10 


213-0904-00 




8 


SCREW,TPG,TR:6-32 X 0.5,PNH,STL 


83385 


CRDER BY DESC 


-11 


351 -0761 -00 




2 


GUIDE,CKT BD:PLASTIC,2.5 L 


18677 


11633-1 


-12 


386-5535-00 




1 


PLATE, REARiALUMINUM 


TK1943 


CRDER BY DESC 


-13 


671 -2909-00 




1 


CIRCUIT BD ASSYSTROBE TDR BUFFER 
(SEE A19, EXCHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


671290900 


-14 


211-0409-00 




10 


SCR,ASSEM WSHR:4-40 X 0.312, PNH,STL,T10 


93907 


829-06888-024 


-15 


670-9361 -00 




1 


CIRCUIT BD ASSYM/F ACOUISITION INTCON 
(SEE A26, EXCHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


670936100 


-16 


407-3562-00 




1 


BRACKETCKT BD:MODULE DISCONNECTAL 


TK1943 


CRDER BY DESC 


-17 


426-2166-00 




1 


FRAME SECTCAB.:MODULE 


80009 


426216600 


-18 


386-5687-00 




2 


SUPPORTCKT BD:PLASTIC 


TK1163 


CRDER BY DESC 


-19 


211-0718-00 




12 


SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.312, FLH,STL 


0KB01 


CRDER BY DESC 


-20 


381 -0452-00 




2 


BAR,LOCKING MDL: 


5Y400 


CRDER BY DESC 


-21 


426-2165-00 




1 


FRAME SECTCAB.:MODULE 


TK1465 


426-2165-00 


-22 


384-1756-00 




1 


ROD,LOCKING:0.25,SST 


TK0588 


384-1756-00 


-23 


670-9366-02 




4 


CIRCUIT BD ASSYHEAD INTERCONNECT 
(SEE A20,A21 ,A22,A23, EXCHANGE ITEMS) 


80009 


670936602 


-24 


210-0458-00 




4 


NUTPL,ASSEM WA:8-32 X 0.344,STL 


0KB01 


210-0458-00 


-25 


136-0894-00 




2 


SKT,PL-IN ELEK:3.5 X 3.5 X 1 .86,ALUMINUM 


TK1916 


CRDER BY DESC 


-26 


211-0372-00 




4 


SCREW,MACHINE:4-40 X 0.31 2,PNH,STL 


93907 


B80- 00020 -003 


-27 


348-0235-00 




2 


SHLD GSKT,ELEK: FINGER TYPE,4.734 L 


TK1465 


348-0235-00 


-28 


355-0259-00 




4 


STUD,LOCKING:0.850X 0.188 HEX,SST 


TK0588 


CRDER BY DESC 


-29 


333-3421 -00 




1 


PANEL,FRONT: 


TK2072 


CRDER BY DESC 


-30 


351 -0786-00 




4 


GUIDE,PLUG-IN:PC,3.167 L 


TK1302 


CRDER BY DESC 


-31 


386-5475-00 




1 


SUBPANEL,FR0NT:7.94 X 4.988,AL 


TK1943 


386-5475-00 



10-16 



Mechanical Parts List 






11 801 C Service Manual 



10-17 





Replaceable Parts 



Fig. & 

Index Tektronix Seriai No. Mfr. 

No. Part No. Effective Dscont Qty 12345 Name & Description Code Mfr. Part No. 







WIRE ASSEMBLIES 

(SEE MAINT SECTION FOR CABLING DIAGRAM) 






174-0626-01 


4 


CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX, 16.5 L,9-6 
(FROM A1 9J1 C TO A20J1 C) 

(FROM A1 9J2C TO A21 J2C) 

(FROM A19J3C TO A22J3C) 

(FROM A19J4C TO A23J4C) 


TK2338 


174-0626-01 


174-0627-01 


4 


CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX, 15.0 L,9-5 
(FRO M A1 9 J 1 A TO A20 J 1 A) 

(FROM A19J2A TO A21J2A) 

(FAROM A1 9J3A TO A22J3A) 

(FROM A1 9J4A TO A23J4A) 


TK2338 


174-0627-01 


174-0628-01 


1 


CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,13.0 L,9-1 
(FROM A1 8J1 B TO A20J1 B) 


TK2338 


174-0628-01 


174-0629-01 


1 


CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,10.6 L,9-2 
(FROM A18J1BTOA21J1B) 


TK2338 


174-0629-01 


174-0630-01 


1 


CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,8.2 L.9-3 
(FROM A19J3B TO A22J3B) 


TK2338 


174-0630-01 


174-0631-01 


1 


CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,5.8 L.9-4 
(FROM A19J4B TO A32J3B) 


TK2338 


174-0631-01 


343-0549-00 


4 


STRARTIEDOWN,E:0.098 W X 4.0 L,ZYTEL 


TK1499 


HW-047 



10-18 



Mechanical Parts List 






Replaceable Parts 



Fig. & 



Index 


Tektronix 


Serial No. 






Mfr. 




No. 


Part No. 


Effective Dscont 


Qty 


12345 Name & Description 


Code 


Mfr. Part No. 










POWER SUPPLY 






10-6-1 


620-0022-09 




1 


POWER SUPPLY: 

(SEE A2, EXCHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


620002209 


-2 


200-2222-00 




1 


GUARD, FAN: 


TK2105 


08213 


-3 


211-0744-00 




4 


SCREW, MACHINE:6-32 X 2.0,PNH,TORX,STL 


TK0435 


ORDER BY DESC 


-4 


200-2264-00 




1 


CARFUSEHOLDER:3AG FUSES 


S3629 


FEK031 1666 


-5 


159-0013-00 




1 


FUSE,CARTRIDGE:3AG,6A,250V,FAST BLOW 
(F99, USED IN FUSE HOLDER) 


75915 


312006 




159-0021-00 




1 


FUSE,CARTRIDGE:3AG,2A,250V,FAST BLOW 
(F410, PART OF LINE INVERTER BOARD) 


71400 


AGC-2 




159-0248-00 




1 


FUSE,WIRE LEAD:1.5 A 

(F650, PART OF LINE INVERTER BOARD) 


71400 


TR/MCR-1 1/2 




159-0220-00 




1 


FUSE,WIRE LEAD:3A,125V,FAST 

(F740, PART OF CONTROL RECTIFIER BOARD) 


61857 


SP5-3A 


-6 


407-3362-00 




1 


BRACKET,FAN:0.050 5005 H-34 


5Y400 


ORDER BY DESC 


-7 


204-0832-00 




1 


BODY,FUSEHOLDER:3AG & 5 X 20MM FUSES 


S3629 


031 1673 


-8 


119-1725-01 




1 


FAN,TUBEAXIAL:8 14.5VDC,6W,3200RPM,106CFM 


2W944 


4112 KX 


-9 


211-0722-00 




8 


SCREW, MACHINE:6-32 X 0.25,PNH,STL 


0KB01 


ORDER BY DESC 




11 801 C Service Manual 



10-19 






Replaceable Parts 



Fig. & 
Index 
No. 


Tektronix 
Part No. 


Seriai No. 
Effective Dscont 


Qty 


12345 Name & Description 


Mfr. 

Code 


Mfr. Part No. 










OPTiON 1M 






10-7-1 


614-0940-00 




1 


SUBPANEL ASSY: 
(EXCHANGE ITEM) 


80009 


614094000 


-2 


211-0721-00 




11 


SCREW, MACHINE:6-32 X 0.375, PNH, STL 


0KB01 


ORDER BY DESC 


-3 


103-0269-00 




20 


ADAPTER, CONN:SMA TO PELTOLA 


24931 


39JR198-1 


-4 


386-5472-00 




1 


PLATE,CONN MTG:ALUMINUM 


TK1943 


ORDER BY DESC 


-5 


386-5471 -00 




1 


SUBPANEUREAR: 


TK1916 


ORDER BY DESC 










WiRE ASSEMBLiES 

(SEE MAINT SECTION FOR CABLING DIAGRAM) 








174-0608-00 




1 


CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX, 167.0L, 9-2, 
167.0L, 9-2,1 79.0L, 9-3, 179.0L, 9-3 
(TO A1 9J23A,J30A, J33A, J33B) 

(TO A5J29B.J30B) 

(TO A1J33A,J33B) 


TK2469 


ORDER BY DESC 




174-0613-00 




12 


CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX, 7.0 L,9-N 
(FROM A1 +1,+2,+3,+4 TO REAR PNL MCU TDR 
DRIVE +1,+2,+3,+4) 

(FROM A1 -1 ,-2,-3, -4 TO REAR PNL MCU TDR 
DRIVE -1,-2, -3,-4) 

(FROM A1 1 ,2,3,4 TO REAR PANEL MCU STROBE 
SENSE 1,2, 3, 4) 


TK2469 


ORDER BY DESC 




174-0618-00 




8 


CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX, 15.0 L,9-N 
(FROM A5+1 ,+2,+3,+4 TO REAR PANEL MCU 
STROBE DRIVE +1,+2,+3,+4) 

(FROM A5-1,-2,-3,-4 REAR PANEL MCU 
STROBE DRIVE -1,-2, -3, -4) 


TK2469 


ORDER BY DESC 




174-1093-00 




1 


CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,30.0 L,9-2 
(FROM A1J15TOA5J15) 


TK2469 


ORDER BY DESC 



10-20 



Mechanical Parts List 






Replaceable Parts 



Fig. & 



Index 

No. 


Tektronix 
Part No. 


Seriai No. 
Effective Dscont 


Qty 


12345 Name & Description 


Mfr. 

Code 


Mfr. Part No. 










STANDARD ACCESSORiES 






10-8-1 


161-0066-00 




1 


CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3,18AWG,98 L 


0B445 


ECM-161 -0066-00 


-2 


161-0154-00 




1 


CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3,1.00MM SQ,250V,10A,2.5M 
(OPTION A5 ONLY) 


S3 109 


12-H05WF3G 00 


-3 


161-0066-12 




1 


CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3,18 AWG,98 L 
(OPTION A4 ONLY) 


29870 


ORDER BY DESC 


-4 


161-0066-11 




1 


CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3,1.00MM SQ,250V,10A,2.5M 
(OPTION A3 ONLY) 


S3 109 


198-000 


-5 


161-0066-10 




1 


CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3,0.1MM SO, 250V, 2.5 M 
(OPTION A2 ONLY) 


S3 109 


BS/13-H05WF3G0 


-6 


161-0066-09 




1 


CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3,0.75MM SO, 220V, 99.0 L 
(OPTION A1 ONLY) 


S3 109 


86511000 




174-1120-00 




2 


CA ASSY,RF:COAXIAL,;RFD,50 OHM,8.0 L 


TK2469 


ORDER BY DESC 




174-1364-00 




1 


CABLE ASSY,RF:12.0 L,0-N 


TK2469 


ORDER BY DESC 




070-9970-xx 




1 


MANUAL,TECH:PROGRAMMER,11801C/CSA803C 


80009 


0709970XX 




070-9971 -XX 




1 


MANUAL,TECH:USER,11801C 


80009 


0709971 XX 




070-9972-xx 




1 


MANUAL,TECH:SERVICE,1 1 801 C 


80009 


0709972XX 










OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 








012-0555-00 




1 


CABLE, INTCON:CENTRONIX,3 METERS LONG 


TK1416 


DKIT-0034HCZZ 




012-0911-00 




1 


CABLE, INTCON:MOLDED,RS232;10 FT 


TK2435 


ORDER BY DESC 




012-0991-00 




1 


CABLE, COMPOSITE:IDC,GPIB:2 METER 


00779 


553577-3 




012-0991-01 




1 


CABLE, GPIB:LOW EMI,1 METER 


00779 


553577-2 




012-1220-00 




1 


CAASSYSRELEC:1 METER LONG 


TK2469 


ORDER BY DESC 




012-1221-00 




1 


CA ASSYSRELEC:2 METER LONG 


TK2469 


ORDER BY DESC 




200-3395-00 




1 


COVSMRLG HEAD:SNAR-IN 


TK1163 


ORDER BY DESC 



10-22 



Mechanical Parts List 






Replaceable Parts 




Figure 10-8: Accessories 



11 801 C Service Manual 



10-23 





Replaceable Parts 



10-24 



Mechanical Parts List